Chevrolet | 2004 Epica | Specifications | Chevrolet 2004 Epica Specifications

Chevrolet 2004 Epica Specifications
2004 Chevrolet Epica Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-9
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-10
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-28
Air Bag Systems
...................................... 1-46
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-55
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-7
Windows ................................................. 2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-15
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-18
Mirrors .................................................... 2-31
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-33
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-35
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-18
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-30
Secondary Information Center (SIC) ............ 3-46
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-48
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
........ 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-29
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-40
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-41
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-47
Tires
...................................................... 5-48
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-68
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-77
Electrical System ...................................... 5-78
Capacities and Specifications
..................... 5-85
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-11
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French language copy of this manual
from your dealer or from:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, and the CHEVROLET Emblem are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
The name EPICA is a trademark of General Motors
Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after
that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appears
in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road.
If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it
so the new owner can use it.
Part No. 04EPICA A First Edition
ii
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do
this, it will help you learn about the features and controls
for your vehicle. In this manual, you will find that pictures
and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in
the manual, and the page number where you will find it.
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 10/01/03
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
You will also find a
circle with a slash
through it in this book.
This safety symbol means
“Don’t,” “Don’t do this”
or “Don’t let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
are shown along with the text describing the operation
or information relating to a specific component, control,
message, gage or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols you may find on your vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ..............................1-3
Power Seat ...................................................1-3
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-5
Heated Seats .................................................1-5
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-6
Head Restraints .............................................1-8
Rear Seats .......................................................1-9
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-9
Safety Belts ...................................................1-10
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-10
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-15
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-16
Driver Position ..............................................1-16
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-23
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-24
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-24
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-27
Child Restraints .............................................1-28
Older Children ..............................................1-28
Infants and Young Children ............................1-30
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-34
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-37
Top Strap ....................................................1-37
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-39
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-40
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ....................................1-43
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position .........................1-43
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Rear Seat Position ..........................1-46
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ............................1-46
Air Bag Systems ............................................1-46
Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-49
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-51
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-52
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-52
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates? ...................................................1-53
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-54
Restraint System Check ..................................1-55
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-55
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-55
1-1
Front Seats
Pull up and hold the bar
located under the front of
the seat to unlock it.
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar.
Then try to move the seat with your body, to make
sure the seat is locked into place.
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
Power Seat
Your vehicle may have a manual driver seat height
adjuster.
If your vehicle has this feature, the eight–way power
seat controls are located on the outboard side of
the driver’s seat cushion.
To adjust the height of
the driver’s seat cushion,
turn the knobs located
on the outboard side of
the seat cushion.
This control allows you to move the seat up, down,
forward or rearward. It will also move the front or rear
of the seat cushion up or down, and tilt the seatback
forward or rearward.
To adjust the power seat, do the following:
Move the seat forward
or rearward by pushing
and holding the switch
toward the front or rear
of the vehicle.
Turn the front knob to adjust the height of the front
portion of the seat cushion. Turn the rear knob to adjust
the height of the rear portion of the seat cushion.
1-3
Raise or lower the front
of the seat cushion by
pushing the front part of
the switch up or down.
Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion by pushing
the rear part of the switch up or down.
Raise or lower the entire seat cushion by pushing the
entire switch up or down.
1-4
Adjust the angle of the
seatback by pushing the
upper switch forward
or rearward.
When the seat reaches the desired position, release
the switch.
Manual Lumbar
Heated Seats
To adjust the driver’s
front seat lumbar support,
use the lever located
on the outboard side of
the driver’s seatback.
Push the lever down to adjust the support for the lower
part of the seatback.
Pull the lever up to return the support to its original
position.
Your vehicle may have heated front seats.
The buttons are located
on the center console
above the ashtray.
There is a button for the driver’s seat and a button for
the passenger’s seat. Press the appropriate button
to turn on the heated seat feature. The indicator light
in the button will illuminate while the feature is on.
Press the appropriate button again to turn off the
heated seat feature.
1-5
Reclining Seatbacks
To adjust the seatback,
lift the lever located on
the outboard side of
the seat cushion and
move the seatback
to where you want it.
Release the lever and push rearward on the seatback
to make sure it is locked.
Pull up on the lever without pushing on the seatback
and the seatback will go to an upright position.
1-6
But do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
{CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
1-7
Head Restraints
Pull up the head restraint in order to adjust the position
upward.
Push in the release button on the head restraint in order
to adjust the position downward.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position reduces
the chances of a neck injury in a crash.
1-8
The front head restraints
also tilt forward.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Your vehicle has a split folding rear seatback with a
center armrest. You can fold down either side of
the seatback to increase cargo space.
Folding the Seatback
To fold down the seatback, do the following:
To tilt the head restraint, first put it in its upright position
by pushing it forward fully and releasing it. Then slowly
move the head restraint forward until it is in the desired
position.
To remove the head restraint, pull the head restraint all
the way up. Then push in the release button and lift
the head restraint from the guide sleeve.
1. Make sure that the front seats are not reclined.
If they are, the rear seatbacks will not fold down
all of the way.
2. Press down on the
release button located
on top of the rear
seatback.
Replace the head restraint and reset it in the original
position before driving.
1-9
3. Fold the rear seatback forward and down.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To return the seatback to the upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift up the seatback and push it to its original
position. Ensure that the safety belts are not twisted
or caught under the seat cushion.
2. Push down firmly on the top of the seatback until it
latches securely in the fully upright position.
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
CAUTION:
1-10
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-33.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter... a lot!
1-11
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on
wheels.
1-12
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-13
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-14
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be – whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in
an accident – even one that isn’t your fault – you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have
to wear safety belts?
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are supplemental
systems only; so they work with safety belts – not
instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered
for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if
you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to
buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not
only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and
other collisions.
1-15
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-28
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-30. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-16
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-17
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you. Adjust the
height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered
on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
1-18
To move it down, squeeze the release button and move
the height adjuster to the desired position. You can
move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder
belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it down without squeezing the
release button to make sure it has locked into position.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-19
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A:
1-20
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-21
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A:
1-22
The belt is twisted across the body.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-23
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Rear Seat Passengers
Right Front Passenger Position
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-16.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt – except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way
and start again.
1-24
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here
is how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-25
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-26
Safety Belt Pretensioners
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. They help the safety belts
reduce a person’s forward movement in a moderate to
severe crash in which the front of the vehicle hits
something.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you’ll need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-55.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-27
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q:
A:
What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-28
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
If the child is sitting in the center rear seat
passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint that belts provide.
1-29
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-30
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t
weigh much -- until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible
to hold it. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
a person’s arms. A baby should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
1-31
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A:
1-32
Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight,
height and age but also whether or not the restraint
will be compatible with the motor vehicle in
which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in
a rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so
the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that’s unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
1-33
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-34
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see
out the window.
1-35
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have
used the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to
be secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s
belt system secures the add-on child restraint in
the vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-36
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system
or the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce
the chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with
the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Top Strap
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
In addition, the only seats in the vehicle that are designed
to accommodate a child restraint are the rear outboard
seating positions. Do not install a child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat and/or the rear center seating
position. The child restraint will not fit properly.
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap
being anchored. Others require the top strap always
to be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires
that the top strap be anchored, don’t use the restraint
unless it is anchored properly.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a
kit is available.
1-37
Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in
Top Strap Anchor Location on page 1-39. Be sure to
use an anchor point located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
{CAUTION:
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
1-38
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Top Strap Anchor Location
Top strap anchors are already installed in your vehicle
for the rear seating positions.
Pull the front part of the
plastic cover upward to
access the top strap
anchors.
Do not use a child restraint with a top strap in the right
front passenger’s position because there is no place
to anchor the top strap.
You will find the anchors behind the rear seat on the
filler panel.
1-39
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors (A) for the rear outside seating positions.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety
belts. Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A, B) and child
restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure
a top tether strap (C).
1-40
A
B
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this
child restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH system has either label A or B on the seatback.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint designed for that system.
1-41
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
its anchorage points, the restraint will not be
able to protect the child correctly. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions
in this manual.
These labels are located at each lower anchor position,
near the base of the seat.
Child restraints and booster cushions that can be used
with the LATCH system are identified with label A.
1-42
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-40.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on
the child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in
the vehicle. The child restraint instructions will
show you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-37.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the
top tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-40. See Top Strap
on page 1-37 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-43
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-44
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor while you push down on the
child restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-45
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Rear Seat Position
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag
systems.
Your vehicle has a frontal air bag for the driver and a
frontal air bag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle
may also have a side impact air bag for the driver,
and another side impact air bag for the right front
passenger.
Do not use child restraints in this position. The restraints
will not work properly.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Do not use child restraints in this position. The restraints
will not work properly.
1-46
If your vehicle has a side impact air bag, the words
AIR BAG will appear on the air bag covering on the
side of the seatback closest to the door.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.
But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag systems:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt – even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected
from it. Air bags are designed to work with
safety belts but do not replace them.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal air bags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more forceful
air bags have provided in the past.
A side impact air bag is designed to inflate only
in moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. It is not designed
to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly – whether or not there is an air bag
for that person.
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
CAUTION:
(Continued)
1-47
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward,
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts
help keep you in position for air bag inflation
before and during a crash. Always wear
your safety belt, even with frontal air bags.
The driver should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Front occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
(Continued)
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its air bag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see the part of this
manual called “Older Children” or “Infants and
Young Children.”
There is an air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows AIR BAG.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
CAUTION:
1-48
(Continued)
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-33.
Where Are the Air Bags?
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
1-49
If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact air bag is
in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-50
If your vehicle has one, the passenger’s side impact air
bag is in the side of the passenger’s seatback closest
to the door.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering. Don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is about
9 to 14 mph (14.5 to 23 km/h). The threshold level can
vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact air
bag. See “Air Bag Systems” in the Index. A driver’s side
impact air bag is designed to inflate in moderate to
severe side crashes involving the driver’s door. A side
impact air bag will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system’s designed “threshold level.” The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
A driver’s side impact air bag is not designed to inflate
in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear
impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.
1-51
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact
air bags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the air bag. The inflator, the air bag and related hardware
are all part of the air bag modules. Frontal air bag
modules are located inside the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For vehicles with side impact air bags,
the air bag modules are located in the seatback closest to
the driver’s and/or right front passenger’s door.
1-52
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal air
bags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and many side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward the
air bag. Side impact air bags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including frontal or near frontal
collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air
bags should never be regarded as anything more than a
supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and
right front passenger’s frontal air bags, and only in
moderate to severe side collisions for vehicles with a
driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact air bag.
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module – the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the instrument
panel for the right front passenger’s bag, the side of the
seatback closest to the door for the driver’s side impact
air bag – will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag
that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too
hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation
does not prevent the driver from seeing or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
but can’t get out of the vehicle after an air
bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional
windshield breakage may also occur from the right front
passenger air bag.
• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your air bag system. If you do not get them, the air
bag system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include air bag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
(Continued)
1-53
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing
and diagnostic module, which records information
about the frontal air bag system. The module
records information about the readiness of the
system, when the system commands air bag
inflation and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.
The module also records speed, engine rpm,
brake and throttle data.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air bag
system will not work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s air bag, or an air
bag covering on a seatback, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag
module in the steering wheel, both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s air bag, or the air bag module and
seatback for a side impact air bag. Do not open
or break the air bag coverings.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the air
bag systems. To purchase a service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-12.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close
to an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-54
Restraint System Check
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
1-55
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.
If the frontal air bags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety
belt pretentioners and safety belt. Be sure to do
so. Then the new pretensioner and safety belt will be
there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
right front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies,
even if the frontal air bags have not deployed. The
driver and right front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assemblies contain the safety belt pretensioners.
1-56
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a collision, or if your air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle or
while you are driving. See Air Bag Readiness Light
on page 3-33.
If your vehicle is equipped with side air bags, the front
seat assembly must be replaced after the side air
bag has been deployed.
If an air bag inflates, you will need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5
Doors and Locks .............................................2-7
Door Locks ....................................................2-7
Central Door Unlocking System ........................2-8
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9
Door Ajar Reminder ........................................2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-10
Lockout Protection ........................................2-10
Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................2-11
Trunk ..........................................................2-11
Windows ........................................................2-13
Power Windows ............................................2-14
Sun Visors ...................................................2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-15
Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-15
Immobilizer ..................................................2-17
Immobilizer Operation ....................................2-17
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-18
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-18
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-19
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-20
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-21
Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-22
Parking Brake ..............................................2-26
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-27
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-28
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-29
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-29
Running Your Engine While
You Are Parked ........................................2-30
Mirrors ...........................................................2-31
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-31
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-31
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-32
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-33
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-33
Storage Areas ................................................2-33
Glove Box ...................................................2-33
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-33
Coinholder(s) ................................................2-33
Sunglasses Storage Compartment ...................2-34
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-34
Rear Seat Armrest ........................................2-34
Sunroof .........................................................2-35
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
One key is used for the
ignition, the doors and
all other locks.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes the
key tag and gives it to the first owner. The tag has a
code on it that tells your dealer how to make extra keys.
For vehicle security, keep the key tag in a safe place and
also record the key number somewhere other than inside
of the vehicle. If you lose your key, you will be able to
have a new one made easily using the tag.
Your vehicle may have an electronic immobilizer
designed to protect your car against theft. If so, only
keys with the correct electronic code can be used
to start the vehicle. Even if a key has the same profile,
it will not start the engine if the electronic code is
incorrect. If you need a new key, contact your dealer
who can obtain the correct key code. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-6 for more information.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-5.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or
a qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
The following functions
are available on your
vehicle’s remote keyless
entry system:
If the door is not opened or if the engine is not started
within 30 seconds after unlocking the doors with the
transmitter, all of the doors will automatically lock and the
theft-deterrent system will re-activate.
V(Trunk): Press this button to unlock the trunk. The
horn will chirp twice to indicate that the trunk is unlocked.
The LED on the transmitter will flash when the buttons
on the transmitter are pressed.
The lock/unlock and trunk buttons will not operate and
the theft-deterrent system will not activate while the
key is in the ignition.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
n (Lock/Unlock):
Press this button to lock all of the
doors. If all of the doors and the trunk are closed, the
hazard lamps will flash once and the horn will chirp to
indicate that locking has occurred and the theft-deterrent
system will activate.
Press the button again to unlock all of the doors. The
hazard lamps will flash twice to indicate that unlocking
has occurred and the theft-deterrent system will
deactivate.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded
the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
two transmitters matched to it.
2-5
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the LED fails to
illuminate or if the transmitter will not work at the normal
range in any location. If you have to get close to your
vehicle before the transmitter works, it is probably
time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not
to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter, do the following:
1. Remove the screw from the back of the cover and
open the cover of the transmitter.
2. Pull the transmitter out of the cover and carefully
detach the sticker from the unit. Keep the sticker
clean.
3. Remove the battery and replace it with the new
one. Make sure the positive side of the battery
faces up. Use one three-volt, CR1620, or
equivalent, type battery.
4. Attach the sticker and put the transmitter unit in
the cover.
5. Put the two halves back together and replace the
screw. Make sure the cover is on tightly, so water
will not get in.
6. Test the transmitter operation.
2-6
Doors and Locks
CAUTION:
Door Locks
(Continued)
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
the handle will not open it. You increase
the chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors are not
locked. So, wear safety belts properly and
lock the doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 2-5.
To manually unlock the doors from the outside, insert
the key and turn it toward the front of the vehicle.
To manually lock the doors from the outside, insert the
key and turn it toward the rear of the vehicle.
All doors, except the driver’s door, can be locked from
the outside by pushing down the manual door lock
and then closing the door. The driver’s door lock cannot
be pushed in while the door is opened.
Upon leaving the vehicle, the driver’s door can only be
locked from the outside by using the key or the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
2-7
Central Door Unlocking System
The central door unlocking system is activated from the
driver’s door.
From the outside, you can lock or unlock all of the
doors on your vehicle from the driver’s door by using
either the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter.
From the inside, you can lock or unlock all of the doors
using the driver’s or the passenger’s power door lock
switch. You can also lock or unlock all of the doors
by using the manual door lock on the driver’s door.
From the inside, you can lock and unlock all of the
doors by pushing or pulling the manual door lock located
on the window sill on each door.
From the inside, you can also lock and unlock the doors
with the power door lock switches located on each
front door trim pad.
2-8
Power Door Locks
Door Ajar Reminder
With the power door locks,
you can unlock or lock the
doors on your vehicle
using either the driver’s or
front passenger’s door
lock switch.
If one of the doors on
your vehicle is not closed
properly, the door ajar
light on the secondary
information center
will come on and stay on
until the doors are closed.
Push down the right part of the switch to unlock the
doors. Push down on the left part of the switch to lock
the doors.
The driver’s door must be closed in order to lock all of
the doors using the driver’s or passenger’s power door
lock switches. If the driver’s door is open while trying to
lock the doors from the driver’s power door lock switch,
the doors will not lock. If the driver’s door is open while
locking the doors from the passenger’s power door
lock switch, all of the doors will lock, except for the
driver’s door.
The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.
Rear seat passengers must use the manual locks to
lock or unlock the rear doors.
2-9
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear
door security locks on
each rear door that help
prevent passengers
from opening the rear
doors on your vehicle
from the inside.
Opening a Rear Door When the
Security Lock is On
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
If you do not cancel the security lock feature, adults or
older children who ride in the rear will not be able to
open the rear door from the inside. You should let adults
and older children know how to cancel the locks.
Canceling the Rear Door Security Lock
1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the
door from the outside.
Using the Rear Door Security Lock
1. Move the lock upward to the lock position.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
Notice: Pulling the inside door handle while the
rear door security locks are engaged could damage
your vehicle. Do not pull the inside door handle
while the rear door security locks are engaged.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside while this feature is in use.
2-10
2. Move the lock downward to the unlock position.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
Lockout Protection
This feature stops the power door locks from locking the
driver’s door when the driver’s door is open.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving your vehicle, take your keys. All of
the doors, except for the driver’s door, can be locked
from the outside by pushing down the door lock and then
closing the door. The driver’s door can only be locked
from the outside by using the key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
Trunk
To unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the key and
turn the trunk lock cylinder or use the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
When closing the trunk, close from the center to ensure
it fully latches. Although you may use one hand to
unlock the trunk, it is recommended that two hands on
the upper surface be used to close the trunk.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can not see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-29.
2-11
Remote Trunk Release
Press the remote trunk
release button, located
on the driver’s door trim,
to release the trunk lid.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point when securing items in
the trunk may damage it. Use the emergency trunk
release handle only to help you open the trunk lid.
Do not press the remote trunk release button while
your vehicle is moving because your trunk will open
whenever the remote trunk release button is pressed.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the underside of the trunk lid. This
handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle down to open the trunk from the inside.
2-12
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
2-13
Window Lockout
Power Windows
The driver’s power
window controls also
include a lockout
button.
The power window
switches are located
on the armrest on the
driver’s door. In addition,
each passenger door
has a switch for its
own window.
The ignition must be turned to ON to use the power
windows. To lower a window, press down on the switch.
To raise a window, lift up on the switch.
The rear windows do not go all the way down.
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window also has an express-down feature.
This switch is labeled AUTO. Press the switch all the
way down and then release it. The driver’s window will
then go all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press the switch
again. To raise the window, pull up and hold the switch.
2-14
Press the lockout button to stop the front and rear
passengers from using their window switches.
The driver can still operate all the windows with the
lock on. Press the lockout button again to return
to normal window operation.
Sun Visors
To block out glare you can swing down the visors. You
can also remove them from the center mount and swing
them to the side. Pull out the extensions located on the
inboard side of the sun visors to block out glare.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle has lighted vanity mirrors located on the
back of the sun visors. Swing down the sun visor and lift
the cover to expose the vanity mirror. The light will come
on when the cover is opened. The light will go out when
the cover is closed.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal.
Theft-Deterrent System
Your vehicle has a theft-deterrent system.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm when you lock the
doors using the key or the manual door lock. It activates
only when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Arming the System
To arm the system, do the following:
1. Turn the key to LOCK and remove the key from
the ignition.
If the key is inserted in the ignition, the transmitter
will not operate the theft-deterrent system.
2. Close the doors, the windows, the hood, and
the trunk.
Ensure that the windows are closed, as the system
can be activated even if the windows are open.
3. Lock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The transmitter must be used to activate
the theft-deterrent system.
• The LED on the transmitter will flash.
• All of the doors will lock.
• The hazard warning lamps will flash once and
the horn will chirp.
• The theft-deterrent mode will arm.
• The security light will flash once every second to
indicate that the theft-deterrent system is armed.
The security light is located on the top center
of the instrument panel, near the windshield.
To avoid activating the alarm by accident, do one of
the following:
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door using
the key.
• Press the lock/unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will activate the alarm
when a door or the trunk is opened.
If you do not want to arm the theft-deterrent system,
lock the vehicle using the key or the manual door locks.
2-15
Disarming the System
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
To disarm the system, do one of the following:
If the system alarm is active, it can be deactivated using
one of the following methods:
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door using
the key.
• Press the lock/unlock button on the transmitter.
−
−
−
−
The LED on the transmitter will flash.
All of the doors will unlock.
The hazard warning lamps will flash twice.
The theft-deterrent mode will disarm.
If the door is not opened or if the engine is not started
within 30 seconds after disarming the system with
the transmitter, all of the doors will automatically lock
and the theft-deterrent mode will re-arm.
How the System Alarm is Activated
If a door or the trunk is opened without using the key
or the remote keyless entry transmitter, the horn
will sound and the lamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.
2-16
• Press the lock/unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front door using
the key.
Otherwise, the alarm will automatically stop after
30 seconds. The system will then lock the doors and
reactivate the theft-deterrent system.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If the hazard lamps flash once when the lock/unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
pressed, the theft-deterrent system alarm was activated
while you were away.
Immobilizer
Immobilizer Operation
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Your vehicle may have a passive theft-deterrent system.
The immobilizer system prevents your vehicle from
being started by unauthorized persons.
1. this device may not cause interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. this device may not cause interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If your vehicle has an immobilizer system, your vehicle
has a special key that works with the theft-deterrent
system. There is a transponder in the key head that is
electronically coded. The correct key will start the
vehicle. An invalid key immobilizes the engine. The
immobilizer system isolates the power supply to
the ignition system, the fuel pump and the fuel injectors.
The engine immobilizer is activated after the key is turned
to LOCK and removed from the ignition. The security light
located on the top center of the instrument panel, near
the windshield, will flash when the immobilizer is active. If
the light does not flash after removing the key, have the
system checked by your dealer.
The immobilizer system works when you turn the key to
START. If the immobilizer system does not recognize the
electronic code, the engine will not start and the security
indicator will continue blinking. If your key is ever
damaged, you may not be able to start your vehicle.
2-17
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does
not start and the security light continues flashing, the
key may have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition
off and try again.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another key. At this time, you may
also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-79. If the engine still does not start
with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
dealer who can service the theft-deterrent system to
have a new key made.
New Vehicle Break-In
Up to four keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
If you lose or damage your keys, only a GM dealer
can service the theft-deterrent system to have new
keys made.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine
if you turn it off. The theft-deterrent system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by
your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
theft-deterrent system at this time.
In an emergency, contact Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-6.
2-18
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings are not yet broken in.
Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in.
See Towing a Trailer on page 4-35 for
more information.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the
ignition switch, you
can turn the key to
four different positions.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
can not turn it, be sure you are using the correct
key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn
the steering wheel left and right while you turn
the key hard. Turn the key only with your hand.
Using a tool to force it could break the key or the
ignition switch. If none of these works, then
your vehicle needs service.
LOCK: This position locks your steering wheel, ignition,
shift lever and transaxle. This is the only position in
which you can insert or remove the key. For easier key
operation when unlocking the steering wheel, move the
steering wheel from right to left and turn the key to ACC.
ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operates some of
your electrical accessories, such as the radio, but
not the ventilation fan.
ON: This is the position to which the switch returns
after you start your engine and release the key.
The switch stays in ON when the engine is running.
But even when the engine is not running, you can use
ON to operate your electrical accessories, and to display
some instrument panel warning lights.
START: This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The switch will return to
ON for normal driving. Do not turn the key to START
if the engine is running.
Even if the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow
you to operate electrical accessories, such as the radio.
2-19
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that
is a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer
than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery
to be drained much sooner. And the excessive
heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start, wait about 15 seconds and try
again to start the engine by turning the ignition key to
START. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
2-20
When your engine has run about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven.
Do not race your engine when it is cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C),
let the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
3. If your engine still will not start or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing,
but this time keep the pedal down for five or
six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from
the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle has an engine coolant heater. In very cold
weather 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater
can help. You will get easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant
heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours
prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures above
32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured.Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The electrical cord is located near the battery.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt
AC outlet.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature,
the kind of oil you have, and some other things.
Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that
you contact your dealer in the area where you will be
parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the
best advice for that particular area.
2-21
Automatic Transaxle Operation
The automatic transaxle
has a shift lever located
on the console between
the seats.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
There are seven different positions for the automatic
transaxle.
The instrument cluster has a shift lever position indicator
that shows which position the shift lever is in. This
indicator is located on the top right side of the instrument
cluster.
Movement between certain positions requires pushing
the shift lever toward the passenger side while shifting.
This prevents you from changing positions unexpectedly
by blocking the straight movement of the shift lever
while the vehicle is moving. It is also necessary to push
down on the shift lever to shift from NEUTRAL (N) to
REVERSE (R).
2-22
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-27.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle
shift lock control system. You have to apply your regular
brake before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition key is in ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P)
while holding the brake pedal down, see Shifting Out
of Park (P) on page 2-28.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
When shifting from NEUTRAL (N) to REVERSE (R), you
must press down on the shift lever and push it toward
the passenger side of the vehicle while shifting.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Shift
to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If You
Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-28.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart while you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine racing may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Be sure the engine is not racing when shifting
your vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving.
THIRD (3): This position gives you more power and
lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When going down a steep hill.
{CAUTION:
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Do not drive in SECOND (2) at speeds over
65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage the transaxle.
Use THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) as
much as possible. Do not shift into SECOND (2)
unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h)
or you can damage your engine.
2-23
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle will not shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
The driver cannot manually select the shift pattern. The
adaptive shift logic tries to operate in economy mode
as much as possible. Normal and sport modes are used
as little as possible in order to maximize fuel economy.
The first few shifts of every drive cycle may be
somewhat rough until the adaptive shift logic has
learned the driver’s behavior. This is normal.
The transaxle also has the ability to adapt to changing
road grade conditions. It will shift between three
different load settings:
Adaptive Shift Logic
• Load 1 is designed for driving on moderate road
Your automatic transaxle will automatically select from
three adaptive shift patterns based upon driver behavior:
• Load 2 is designed for driving on steep road
• Economy mode provides a softer shift feel and
optimizes fuel economy.
• Normal mode provides a solid shift feel and is used
for normal driving conditions.
• Sport mode provides a firm shift feel and optimizes
performance.
grades.
grades.
• Load 3 is designed for driving downhill and allows
for better engine braking.
If there is a malfunction with the automatic transaxle, the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or the HOLD indicator
light will turn on or flash. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-39 or Hold Mode Light on page 3-38.
Have your vehicle fixed as soon as possible.
2-24
• When the transaxle is in THIRD (3), the transaxle
Hold Mode
Your vehicle’s transaxle has a hold mode.
Press the HOLD button
on the console below
the shift lever to turn
on hold mode.
•
•
operates in a gear range of SECOND (2) to
THIRD (3) and tries to maintain THIRD (3) for as
long as possible.
When the transaxle is in SECOND (2), the transaxle
is fixed in that gear.
When the transaxle is in FIRST (1), the transaxle is
fixed in that gear.
Hold Mode Functions
Winter Function
Press the button again to turn off hold mode, and return
to normal automatic transaxle operation.
While on, the HOLD indicator light on the instrument
panel will light up. See Hold Mode Light on page 3-38.
When hold mode is activated, the transaxle operates
in the following ways:
• When the transaxle is in AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D), the transaxle operates in a gear
range of SECOND (2) to THIRD (3) to AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) and tries to maintain AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) for as long as possible.
Select hold mode while in AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D),
THIRD (3) or SECOND (2) to help the vehicle maintain
traction on slippery road surfaces, such as snow, mud,
or ice.
Avoid Excessive Shifting
Select hold mode while in THIRD (3) to avoid excessive
shifting when the adaptive shift logic is not enough to
prevent excessive shifting when driving in hilly areas.
Manually Controlling Shift
Select hold mode to use your automatic transaxle like
a four-speed manual transaxle.
2-25
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-35.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
If you forget to release the parking brake prior to driving
away, a chime will sound to remind you to release
the parking brake.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
The parking brake lever is located between the bucket
seats.
2-26
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushing the
lever up and toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P). If you can, it means
that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
2-27
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever
out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into
PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat.
To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-27.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift-lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition is turned to ON. See Automatic Transaxle
Operation on page 2-22.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P) while holding the
brake pedal down, try this:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.
2-28
3. Remove the cover over the shift-lock release slot
by prying it off using a small, flat object, like a
screwdriver. The shift-lock release slot is located at
the top of the shift lever.
4. Insert the key into
the shift-lock release
slot and press and
hold the key.
5. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
6. Remove the key from the shift-lock release slot,
insert the key into the ignition and start the engine.
7. Replace the shift-lock release slot cover.
8. Apply and hold the regular brake fully and release
the parking brake.
9. Shift to the gear you want.
10. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can not see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down
to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-29
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-29.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even
if the climate control fan is at the highest
setting. One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-24.
2-30
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-27.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-35.
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Manual Rearview Mirror
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up
or down and side to side. The day/night adjustment
allows you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from any
headlamps behind you. Push the tab away from
you for daytime use; pull it toward you for night use.
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror.
When the automatic dimming feature is turned on, the
mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from
the headlamps behind you. A photocell on the mirror
senses when it is becoming dark outside. Another
photocell built into the mirror face senses when
headlamps are behind you.
2-31
At night, when the glare is too high, the mirror will
gradually darken to reduce glare. This change may
take a few seconds. The mirror will return to its clear
daytime state when the glare is reduced.
To activate the automatic dimming feature, press the
button (B) located below the rearview mirror. To turn
the feature off, press the button (B) again.
Outside Power Mirrors
The control for the
power mirrors is located
on the driver’s side
instrument panel,
below the side outlet.
The ignition must be turned to ON to use the automatic
dimming rearview mirror. The indicator light (C) will
illuminate while this feature is active.
There are two light sensors (A) which detect ambient
light level and glare from vehicles behind you.
Do not cover the sensors as this will cancel the
automatic dimming operation.
Move the outside power mirror control to L for the left
mirror and to R for the right mirror. If you place the
control in the center position, no movement of the mirror
will occur. To adjust a mirror, press the corresponding
edges located on the four-way control pad to move
the mirror in the direction that you want it to go.
The ignition must be turned to ON to adjust the mirrors.
The outside rearview mirrors can be folded flat against
the side of the vehicle by pushing them toward the
vehicle.
2-32
Outside Convex Mirror
Storage Areas
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from
the driver’s seat.
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling the bottom of the handle
upward. Close the glove box with a firm push.
{CAUTION:
Cupholder(s)
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Outside Heated Mirrors
When you operate the rear window defogger, the heated
driver’s and passenger’s outside power mirrors are
warmed to help clear them of ice and snow. See “Rear
Window and Outside Mirror Defogger” under Climate
Control System on page 3-18 or Automatic Climate
Control System on page 3-22 for more information.
The cupholders are located in the center console and in
the rear seat center armrest. To use the front cupholder,
pull up on the edge of the opening. To use the rear
cupholder, pull down the rear seat center armrest.
Coinholder(s)
Your vehicle has a coinholder located to the left of
the steering wheel on the instrument panel. There is
also a card holder located at the top of the coinholder.
To use these feature, pull out the coinholder drawer.
2-33
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
Center Console Storage Area
The center console has two separate storage areas.
The upper compartment is also the armrest. To open
the upper compartment, pull up on the left lever and lift
the lid. To open the lower compartment, pull up on
the right lever and lift the lid. To close the compartments,
push down on the lid until it latches securely.
Rear Seat Armrest
Your vehicle’s rear seat armrest contains two cupholders
and a rear console storage area. To access the
cupholders, pull the armrest down from the rear
seatback. To access the rear console storage area,
pull up on the lever and lift the lid. To close the storage
area, lower the lid and push it down until it latches.
The sunglasses storage compartment is located on
the headliner. To open the sunglasses storage
compartment, press the rear part of the cover. To close
the compartment, pull up and push it until it latches.
2-34
Sunroof
If your vehicle has this feature, the sunroof switch is
located on the headliner between the sun visors. The
sunroof can be opened to a vent position or it can be
express-opened all of the way.
To open the sunroof to the vent position, first manually
open the sunroof shade and then push the front part
of the sunroof switch. To return the sunroof to its original
position, push the rear part of the switch and hold it
until the sunroof reaches the desired position.
To fully open the sunroof, push the rear part of the
sunroof switch. The sunroof will open automatically,
along with the sunroof shade, until you push either the
front or the rear part of the switch again.
To close the sunroof, push the front part of the switch and
hold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if
the switch is released during operation. The sunroof
shade needs to be closed manually.
In both the vent and fully open positions, the air flow can
be adjusted for driving comfort by pushing and holding
the switch until the sunroof moves to the desired position.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
your vehicle has an electrical failure.
2-35
✍ NOTES
2-36
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Windshield Wiper Lever ...................................3-9
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-13
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-15
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-17
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-18
Climate Controls ............................................3-18
Climate Control System .................................3-18
Automatic Climate Control System ...................3-22
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-28
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-28
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-30
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-31
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-32
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-32
Tachometer .................................................3-32
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-33
Safety Belt Reminder Tone ............................3-33
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-33
Charging System Light ..................................3-34
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-35
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-36
Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS)
Warning Light ...........................................3-36
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ...........................................3-37
Traction Control System Active Light ...............3-38
Hold Mode Light ...........................................3-38
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-39
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-39
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-42
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-43
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-43
Daytime Running Lamps
Indicator Light ...........................................3-44
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-44
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-45
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Secondary Information Center (SIC) .................3-46
Clock ..........................................................3-46
Door Ajar Light .............................................3-47
Trunk Ajar Light ............................................3-47
Audio System(s) .............................................3-48
Radio with CD ..............................................3-48
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer ...........................3-55
3-2
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-58
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-59
Radio Reception ...........................................3-59
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-59
Care of Your CD Player ................................3-60
Backglass Antenna .......................................3-60
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are
the following:
A. Air Outlet. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-28.
B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-31.
C. Digital Clock and Secondary Information Center.
See Clock on page 3-46 and Secondary
Information Center (SIC) on page 3-46.
D. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
E. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-18.
F. Outside Power Mirror Control. See Outside
Power Mirrors on page 2-32.
G. Instrument Panel Brightness Thumbwheel.
See “Instrument Panel Brightness” under Interior
Lamps on page 3-15.
H. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
I. Coinholder. See Coinholder(s) on page 2-33.
J. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
K. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-48.
L. Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray. See Ashtrays and
Cigarette Lighter on page 3-18.
M. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-33.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning
flasher button is
located on the center
of the instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem.
Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash
on and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Horn
Press the horn symbol on your steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
3-6
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Your vehicle has a tilt wheel which allows you to adjust
the steering wheel before you drive. You can raise it
to the highest level to give your legs more room when
you exit and enter the vehicle.
The lever that allows you
to tilt the steering wheel
is located on the left
side of the steering
column.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• Turn and Lane-Change Signals
• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
• Flash-to-Pass
To tilt the steering wheel, hold the wheel and pull
the lever toward you. Then, move the wheel to a
comfortable position and release the lever to lock
the wheel in place.
For information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 3-13.
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.
An arrow on the
instrument panel
cluster will flash
in the direction
of the turn or
lane change.
When the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on if the
ignition is turned to ON.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass Feature
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers will not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs. If the arrow still does
not work, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 5-79.
3-8
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
Windshield Wiper Lever
Windshield Wipers
INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to this position to
choose a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the band on the
windshield wiper lever down for a longer delay, or up for a
shorter delay between wipes. The wiper speed can only
be adjusted when the lever is in the INT position.
OFF: Move the lever to this position to turn off the
windshield wipers.
Misting Function
Move the lever toward, but not completely into, the
INT position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there until
the windshield wipers start; then let go. The windshield
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more
wipes, hold the band toward INT longer.
Use this lever located on the right side of the steering
wheel to operate the windshield wipers. The ignition
must be turned to ON to operate the windshield wipers.
HI (High Speed): Move the lever to this position for
wiping at high speed.
LO (Low Speed): Move the lever to this position for
steady wiping at low speed.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent
you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the
wiper blades before using them.
If they are frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen
or thaw them. If your blades do become damaged, get
new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
3-9
Windshield Washer
To wash your windshield, pull the windshield wiper/
washer lever toward you with the ignition turned to ON.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
When you release the lever, the washers will stop, but
the wipers will continue to wipe for about three cycles
and will either stop or will resume at the speed you were
using before.
Cruise Control
If your vehicle has cruise control, you can maintain
a speed of about 18 mph (29 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help
on long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below 18 mph (29 km/h).
3-10
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control shuts off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can not drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin,
the cruise control will automatically disengage.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8.
When road conditions allow you to safely use it again,
you may turn the cruise control back on.
Setting Cruise Control
1. Press the ON/OFF button to turn cruise control on.
An indicator light on the instrument panel cluster
will come on to show you that the cruise control is
on. See Cruise Control Light on page 3-43.
{CAUTION:
2. Accelerate to the speed you want.
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
The cruise control lever
is located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
3. Move the lever toward SET/COAST and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake pedal. This, of course,
shuts off the cruise control. But you do not need to reset
it. Once you are going about 18 mph (29 km/h) or more,
you can briefly move the cruise control lever to
RES/ACC.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the lever to RES/ACC longer, the vehicle will
keep going faster until you release the lever or apply the
brake pedal. So unless you want to go faster, do not hold
the lever at RES/ACC.
3-11
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to a higher speed.
Move the cruise control lever to SET/COAST,
then release the lever and the accelerator pedal.
You will now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise control lever to RES/ACC. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the lever. To increase your speed in
very small amounts, briefly move the lever to
RES/ACC and then release it. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will only work after you have set
the cruise control speed by moving the cruise control
lever to SET/COAST.
3-12
• Move the cruise control lever to SET/COAST until
you reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly move
the lever to SET/COAST. Each time you do this, you
will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Exterior Lamps
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to
keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
pedal takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find
this to be too much trouble and do not use cruise control
on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press the ON/OFF button on the cruise
control lever.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp band has three positions:
23(Headlamps):
Turn the band to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the following:
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamp
• Instrument Panel Lights
3-13
Your headlamps only work when your key is turned
to ON.
; (Parking Lamps):
Turn the band to this position to
turn on the parking lamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
OFF: Turn the band to this position to turn all lamps off,
except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
Lamps On Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off and
the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
Auto-Off Headlamps
Your headlamps will automatically turn off when the
headlamps are on and you turn the key to ACC or LOCK.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
3-14
The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness in daylight when
the following conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp band is in OFF or in the parking
lamp position.
• The parking brake is released.
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, parking
lamps and instrument panel lights will not be illuminated
unless you have turned the exterior lamps control to
the parking lamp or headlamp position.
An indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will
come on when the DRL are on. See Daytime Running
Lamps Indicator Light on page 3-44.
The DRL system will turn off when one of the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is off.
• The parking brakes are on.
• The high-beam headlamps are on.
• The low-beam headlamps are on.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Fog Lamps
Interior Lamps
If your vehicle has this feature, use your fog lamps for
better visibility in foggy or misty conditions.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The button for the fog
lamps is located on the
center of the instrument
panel, above the front
ashtray.
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
The thumbwheel for this
feature is located on the
instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. An indicator
light in the button will illuminate while the fog lamps
are on. Press the button again to turn the fog lamps off.
While using the fog lamps, the ignition must be turned
to ACC or ON and the parking lamps or the low-beam
headlamps must be on.
The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beam
headlamps are turned on. When the high-beam
headlamps are turned off, the fog lamps will come
on again.
Turn the thumbwheel up to brighten the lights or down
to dim them.
Continuous use of the fog lamps will shorten bulb life.
Limit use as necessary.
3-15
Entry Lighting
When you open either a front or a rear door, the door
step lamps inside your vehicle will turn on. The door step
lamps are located on the driver’s and front passenger’s
door trims. The lamps will turn off after you close all
of the doors.
The lamp slowly turns off after the doors are shut. The
OFF position will turn off the lamp completely, even when
a door is opened.
Map Lamps
Dome Lamp
The map lamps are located on the headliner. To turn on a
lamp, press the button next to it. Press the button again to
turn the lamp off.
The switch on the dome lamp has three positions. The
ON position will turn on the lamp. The lamp will stay on
until it is manually turned off. The door, or middle, position
will turn on the lamp whenever a door is opened.
3-16
Trunk Lamp
The trunk lamp comes on when you open your trunk.
Accessory Power Outlets
Your vehicle has an accessory power outlet. With an
accessory power outlet, you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
The accessory power outlet is located on the front of
the center console below the front ashtray.
To use the outlet, remove the protective cap. When not
in use, always cover the outlet with the protective
cap. The accessory power outlet is operational when
the ignition is turned to ACC or ON.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power outlet.
3-17
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
The front ashtray and cigarette lighter are located at
the lower part of the center instrument panel, behind a
cover. Press in the cover and it will automatically open.
To remove the front ashtray for cleaning, pull the bin
out. To replace, press the bin back into place.
The rear ashtray is located at the rear of the center
console. To remove the rear ashtray, press in the
retaining spring and pull the bin out. To replace the rear
ashtray, insert the bottom tabs first and then press in
the retaining spring and push the ashtray closed.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
Your vehicle may have a manual climate control system.
With this system you can control the heating, cooling and
ventilation for your vehicle.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
The cigarette lighter is located to the right of the front
ashtray. To use it, turn the ignition to ACC or ON, push
the cigarette lighter in all the way and let go. When it
is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
9(Fan):
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating.
0 (Off): To turn the fan off, turn the knob all the way
counterclockwise to the off position.
3-18
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
In any setting other than off, the fan will run continuously
with the ignition on. The fan must be on in order for
the air conditioning compressor to run.
TEMP (Temperature): Turn the middle knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to manually increase or decrease
the temperature inside your vehicle. Turn the knob to the
blue area to get cool air and to the red area to get
warm air.
To change the current mode, select one of the following
from the right knob:
E (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
( (Bi-Level):
This mode directs about half of the air
to the instrument panel outlets, and then directs the
remaining air to the floor outlets.
5 (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. If your vehicle has rear outlets, some of the
air will also be directed to them. Be sure to keep the
area under the front seats clear to allow the flow of air to
the rear compartment.
The right knob can also be used to select the defog and
defrost modes. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
? (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air from
coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside
air and odors from entering your vehicle or to help
heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off.
When the button is pressed, an indicator light in the
button will come on. Using the recirculation mode for
extended periods may cause your windows to fog.
If this happens, select the defrost mode.
A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air conditioning compressor on and off. When A/C
is pressed, an indicator light in the button will come on
to let you know that air conditioning is activated.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
For
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
Select the vent mode.
Select the highest fan speed.
Press the A/C button.
Select the recirculation mode.
Select the coolest temperature.
3-19
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
É (Defog):
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is normal.
To help clear the side windows quickly, do the following:
1. Select the bi-level mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Select A/C.
4. Select the temperature.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
or moisture condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is used
properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from
your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly.
Select one of these available modes from the
right knob.
3-20
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the floor outlets. A small amount of air is
also directed to the outboard outlets for the side
windows.
0 (Defrost):
This mode directs the air to the
windshield and the outboard outlets for the side
windows.
To help clear the windshield quickly, do the following:
1. Select the defrost mode.
2. Select the highest temperature.
3. Select the highest fan speed.
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.
Rear Window and Outside Mirror
Defogger
Your vehicle has a rear window and outside mirror
defogger. This feature will only work when the ignition is
turned to ON.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window. Before using
this feature, clear as much snow from the rear
window as possible.
The rear window and outside mirror defogger will turn
off about 15 minutes after the button is pressed.
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the
button again or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.
<T (Rear):
Press this button to turn the rear
window and outside mirror defogger on or off. The
button is located below the audio system. An indicator
light in the button will come on to let your know that
the feature is activated.
3-21
Automatic Climate Control System
Your vehicle may have an automatic climate control
system. With this system you can control the heating,
cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
This is the display for the automatic climate control
system.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Outside temperature display mode indicator
AUTO mode indicator
Outside air mode indicator
Recirculation mode indicator
Fan operation indicator
Fan speed indicator
Automatic Operation
A.
B.
C.
D.
Selected temperature
Defroster indicator
Air distribution mode indicator
Air conditioning indicator
3-22
If your vehicle has this feature, do the following to set
automatic operation:
AUTO (Automatic): Press the AUTO button for
automatic control of the inside temperature, the air
delivery mode and the fan speed. The AUTO mode
indicator will appear on the display.
Press the AUTO button.
MODE: Press this button repeatedly to cycle through
and choose the mode of air delivery into the vehicle.
The system will stay in the selected mode until MODE is
pressed again or until the AUTO button is pressed.
Turn the temperature control knob until the desired
temperature is displayed. You can set the desired
temperature between 64°F (18°C) and 90°F (32°C).
Whenever MODE is pressed, the display will show
the current system settings for five seconds before
returning the display to the exterior temperature.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase the desired
temperature by 1°F (0.5°C). Turn the knob
counterclockwise to decrease the desired temperature
by 1°F (0.5°C).
E(Vent):
OFF: Press this button to turn the system off.
To set the desired temperature, do the following:
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later
in this section.
Manual Operation
w 9 x (Fan):
Press the up arrow to increase the
fan speed and the down arrow to decrease the fan
speed. AUTO mode is cancelled when this button is
pressed.
This mode directs air to the instrument panel
outlets.
( (Bi-level):
This mode directs about half of the air to
the instrument panel outlets, and then directs the
remaining air to the floor outlets.
5 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. If your vehicle has rear outlets, some of the
air will also be directed to them. Be sure to keep the
area under the front seats clear to allow the flow of air to
the rear compartment.
The mode button can also be used to select the defog
mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can
be found later in this section.
3-23
? (Recirculation):
Press this button to keep
outside air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used
to prevent outside air and odors from entering your
vehicle or to help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle
more quickly. Press this button to turn the recirculation
mode on or off.
Using the recirculation mode for extended periods may
cause your windows to fog. If this happens, select
the defrost mode.
A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to override
the automatic system and turn the air conditioning
system on or off. When A/C is pressed, the indicator
light on the display panel will come on to let you know
that it is activated.
Press this button again to turn the air conditioning
system off, or press the OFF button to turn the entire
system off.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, press the AUTO button
and the system will automatically enter recirculation
mode and the temperature will be at the full cold position
for maximum cooling.
3-24
Using these settings together for long periods of time may
cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too dry.
To prevent this from happening, after the air in your
vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Outside Temperature: To display the outside
temperature, press the temperature control knob.
Pressing this knob again will cancel the outside
temperature display, otherwise the display will return
to the temperature inside of the vehicle after about
five seconds.
The outside temperature sensor is located near the
front bumper, so the displayed temperature may
be affected by road or engine heat while the vehicle
is idling or traveling at slow speeds. For this reason,
the displayed temperature will be most accurate
at speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h).
Sensors
The solar sensor (A) on your vehicle monitors solar
radiation and uses the information to maintain the
selected temperature by initiating needed adjustments
to the temperature, the fan speed and the air delivery
system. Do not cover the solar sensor located in
the center of the instrument panel, near the windshield,
or the system will not work properly.
There is also a temperature sensor located beside the
audio system on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This
sensor reads the inside air temperature and helps to
establish ventilation system requirements while operating
in AUTO mode. Do not cover the temperature sensor or
the system will not work properly.
3-25
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
or moisture condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is used
properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from
your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly.
É (Defog):
Press the MODE button until the defog
symbol appears on the automatic climate control system
display.
This mode directs most of the air to the windshield and
the floor outlets. A small amount of air is also directed
to the outboard outlets for the side windows.
To help clear the side windows quickly, do the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select
Select
Select
Select
3-26
the bi-level mode.
the highest fan speed.
A/C.
the temperature.
1 (Defrost):
Press the defrost button to select the
defrost function.
Pressing this button directs the air to the windshield and
the outboard outlets for the side windows.
To help clear the windshield quickly, do the following:
1. Select the defrost mode.
2. Select the highest temperature.
3. Select the highest fan speed.
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.
To cancel defrost, press the MODE or AUTO buttons.
If you press the AUTO button, the system will operate
automatically.
Rear Window and Outside Mirror
Defogger
Your vehicle has a rear window and outside mirror
defogger. This feature will only work when the ignition
is turned to ON.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window. Before using
this feature, clear as much snow from the rear
window as possible.
The rear window and outside mirror defogger will turn
off about 15 minutes after the button is pressed.
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the
button again or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.
<T (Rear):
Press this button to turn the rear
window and outside mirror defogger on or off. The
button is located below the audio system. An indicator
light in the button will come on to let your know that
the feature is activated.
3-27
Outlet Adjustment
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Use the lever located in the center of each outlet to
change the direction of the airflow. Use the thumbwheel
located above the side outlets to turn them on and off.
3-28
Your vehicle has a passenger compartment air filter.
It is located on the passenger side at the base of
the windshield and can be accessed through a
removable panel under the hood of the vehicle.
The filter traps most of the pollen from air entering the
module. Like your engine’s air cleaner/filter, it may
need to be changed periodically.
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
1. Raise the hood.
3. Remove the old passenger compartment air filter.
4. Then reverse the steps to install the new air
filter and replace the access panel.
2. Unscrew and remove the three clips and the access
panel.
3-29
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that may
be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your
warning lights and gages could also save you or others
from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some warning
lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let
you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this
section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
3-30
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when there’s
a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drive safely and economically.
Your vehicle has this instrument panel cluster, which includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained
on the following pages.
3-31
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Press the RESET button until zeros appear to reset each
trip odometer. The RESET button resets only the trip
odometer that is being displayed. Each trip odometer
must be reset individually.
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven in kilometers.
Tachometer
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can record the number of kilometers
traveled for up to two trips.
The tachometer
displays your engine
speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
The trip odometer
buttons are located to
the right of the steering
wheel above the ignition
switch.
You can cycle between the odometer and trip
odometers A and B by pressing the MODE button.
By pressing this button, you can tell how many
kilometers have been recorded on either Trip A or
Trip B since you last set the odometer back to zero.
3-32
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not operate the engine
with the tachometer in the shaded warning area.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
The safety belt light will
come on and stay on until
the driver’s safety belt
is buckled.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the light will not
come on.
Safety Belt Reminder Tone
If your vehicle has this feature, a tone will sound for
several seconds when the ignition is turned to ON
to remind people to fasten their safety belts. The tone
will not sound if the driver’s safety belt is already
buckled.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks
the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system
check includes the air bag sensor, the air bag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic
module. For more information on the air bag system,
see Air Bag Systems on page 1-46.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
3-33
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should turn on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition to ON. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready
to warn you if there is a problem.
3-34
Charging System Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
and the engine is not
running, as a check
to show you it is working.
Then it should go out when the engine is started.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
It could indicate that you have a loose generator drive
belt, or another electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving while this light is on could drain your
battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition to ON. If it does
not come on then, have
it fixed so it will be ready
to warn you if there is
a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does not fully
release. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
3-35
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
If your vehicle has an
anti-lock brake system,
this light will come on when
the ignition is turned to
ON and may stay on
for several seconds.
That is normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK. Or, if the
light comes on, stop as soon as possible and turn the
ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again
while you are driving, your vehicle needs service. If the
regular brake system warning light is not on, you still
have brakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also on,
you do not have anti-lock brakes and there is a problem
with your regular brakes. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-35.
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. This is
normal. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-36
Speed Sensitive Power Steering
(SSPS) Warning Light
This warning light will
come on briefly when
you turn the ignition
to ON as a check to
show you it is working.
Then it should go out after a few seconds.
If the warning light does not come on, have it fixed so
it will be able to warn you if there is a problem.
If the warning light stays on, or comes on while you are
driving, the SSPS system may not be working. If this
happens, see your dealer for service.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
If your vehicle has the
Traction Control System
(TCS), this light comes
on for a few seconds
when the ignition is
turned to ON.
If the light does not come on, then have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
The TCS warning light may also come on for the
following reasons:
• If you turn the system off by pressing the TCS button
located below the shift lever, the light will come on
and stay on. To turn the system back on, press the
button again and the warning light should go out.
• If there is a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the TCS will turn off and
the warning light will come on. If your brakes begin to
overheat, the TCS will turn off and the warning light
will come on until the brakes cool down.
If the TCS warning light comes on and stays on for an
extended period of time when the system is turned
on, there may be a problem with your TCS and your
vehicle needs service.
When the TCS warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
3-37
Traction Control System Active
Light
If your vehicle has the
Traction Control System
(TCS), the TCS active
light comes on for a
few seconds when the
ignition is turned to ON.
Hold Mode Light
If your vehicle has this
feature, this light will come
on when the hold mode
is active.
If the HOLD mode light flashes, have your vehicle
checked. See “Hold Mode” under Automatic Transaxle
Operation on page 2-22 for additional information
on this feature.
If the light does not come on, then have it fixed so it will
be ready to tell you when the system is active.
The TCS active light turns on while the traction control
function is actively operating.
3-38
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Your vehicle has an
engine coolant temperature
gage. With the ignition
turned to ON, this
gage shows the engine
coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine
is too hot. It means that your engine coolant has
overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-22.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The Check Engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
3-39
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls may
not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine, transaxle,
exhaust, intake or fuel system of your vehicle or
replacement tires that do not match your vehicle’s
original tires can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
When the ignition is on, this light should come on
and should go out after a few seconds as a check to
show you it is working. If the light does not come
on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-40
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed.
• Avoiding hard accelerations.
• Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is
On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service as soon
as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You also may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the Check
Engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery
has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This may take several days of routine driving.
If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your
GM dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
3-41
• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light may blink
Oil Pressure Light
on and then off.
If you have a low engine
oil pressure problem,
this light will stay on after
you start your engine,
or come on when you are
driving. This indicates
that your engine is
not receiving enough oil.
The engine could be low on oil, or could have some
other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for
a moment. This is normal.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
The oil light could also come on in three other situations:
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to show you
it is working. The light will go out when you turn
the ignition on. If it does not come on with the
ignition on, you may have a problem with the fuse
or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
3-42
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Cruise Control Light
If your vehicle has this
feature, this light will
come on briefly when the
ignition is on.
If the light does not come on, then have it fixed so it
will be ready to tell you when the system is active.
The CRUISE light comes on whenever the cruise control
is set. See Cruise Control on page 3-10. The light will
turn off when the cruise control is turned off.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the high-beam
headlamps are on.
See “Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer” under
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7 for
additional information.
3-43
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator
Light
This light will come on
when the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) are on.
A flashing DRL light indicates a possible burned out
headlamp, or that the vehicle may need service to repair
a defective DRL relay.
See “Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” under Exterior
Lamps on page 3-13 for further information on the
DRL system.
3-44
Fuel Gage
Your fuel gage tells
you about how much
fuel you have left when
the ignition is on.
When the tank nears empty, the low fuel warning light
will come on. You still have a little fuel left, but you
should get more soon. See Low Fuel Warning Light on
page 3-45 for more information.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light comes on
when the fuel tank
is low on fuel.
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took
a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity
to fill the tank.
• The indicator moves a little when you turn a corner
or speed up.
For your fuel tank’s capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-85.
The low fuel warning light comes on when there is
approximately 2.0 gallons (7.5 liters) of fuel remaining
in the tank.
To turn the light off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See
Filling Your Tank on page 5-7.
3-45
Secondary Information
Center (SIC)
Your vehicle has a secondary information center (SIC).
The SIC displays the digital clock, the door ajar
and the trunk ajar lights. The SIC is located on the
instrument panel, above the center air outlets.
See Instrument Panel Overview on page 3-4.
Clock
Your vehicle has a digital clock located in the secondary
information center (SIC). When the ignition is turned
to ACC or ON, the time is displayed in the digital clock.
There are three adjusting buttons for the digital clock:
H (Hour): To go forward one hour, press the H button
once. To go forward more than one hour, press and hold
the button until the correct hour is reached.
M (Minute): To go forward one minute, press the M
button once. To go forward more than one minute, press
and hold the button until the correct minute is reached.
S (Set): To reset the time to the nearest hour, press
the S button.
3-46
For example, if the Set button is pressed while the time
is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display is set to 8:00.
If this button is pressed while the time is between 8:30
and 8:59, the display is set to 9:00.
After disconnecting the battery or replacing the fuse,
reset the clock.
Trunk Ajar Light
This light will come on
when the trunk is not
completely closed.
Door Ajar Light
When the ignition is on,
this light will stay on until
all doors are closed
and completely latched.
3-47
Audio System(s)
Radio with CD
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio – be sure you can add
what you want. If you can, it’s very important to do it
properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio or other
systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
systems may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added improperly.
Playing the Radio
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get the
most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it
first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls to be sure you are getting the most out
of the advanced engineering that went into it.
ON/OFF: Press this knob to turn the system on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
Finding a Station
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show your selection.
TUN (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
SCAN: Push and release this knob to scan radio
stations. The radio will go to a station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. Push this knob
again to stop scanning.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-48
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM), by performing the following steps:
SOUND (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BAS
appears on the display. Then turn the volume knob to
increase or to decrease the bass. The display will show
the bass level. When finished making your selection,
press this button to select the bass level.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
for longer than two seconds. The pushbutton number
will flash on the display when the station has been
set. Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton,
the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Automatic Store
You can also automatically store six FM1 preset stations
with the strongest reception in the region. Press the AST
button for longer than one second. Once the stations are
stored, the radio will switch to FM1 and the first preset
station will begin to play. FM-A will appear on the display
when listening to the automatic stored stations. Press the
AM-FM button to cancel automatic store.
Press this button until TRE appears on the display.
Then turn the volume knob to increase or to decrease
the treble. The display will show the treble level.
When finished making your selection, press this button
to select the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
you may want to decrease the treble.
SOUND (Equalization): Press this button until EQ OFF
appears on the display to select customized equalization
settings designed for classic, pop, rock, jazz, and voice.
Then turn the volume knob until the desired equalization
setting appears on the display. When finished making
your selection, press the SOUND button to select the
equalization setting.
To cancel an equalization setting, press the SOUND
button until EQ OFF appears on the display, turn the
volume knob until OFF appears on the display, then
press the SOUND button again to select the equalization
setting.
3-49
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
SOUND (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this button
until BAL appears on the display. Then turn the volume
knob to increase or to decrease the balance between the
right and the left speakers. The display will show the
balance level. When finished making your selection,
press this button to select the balance level.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Then turn the volume knob to increase or to
decrease the fade between the front and the rear
speakers. The display will show the fade level. When
finished making your selection, press this button to
select the fade level.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
You can insert a CD with the ignition off.
When the CD is inserted, CDP will appear on the
display. As the CD is loading Filecheck will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, Track
and the track number will appear on the display.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
3-50
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
2 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to repeat the
current track. RPT will appear on the display. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.
3 INT (SCAN): Press this button to listen to the first few
seconds of each track on each CD inserted. INTRO
will appear on the display. To stop scanning press this
button again. The current track will begin to play.
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM
will appear on the display. Press this pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
TRACK (Previous/Next Track): Turn this knob one
notch to go to the start of the current track or to go to
the next track. The track number will appear on the
display. The player will continue moving backward or
forward through the CD with each turn of the knob.
TUN (Forward/Reverse): Push and hold this knob to
fast forward or to reverse through the current track.
AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. CDP will appear on the display when the
CD player has been selected.
Press this button while a CD is playing to pause the
CD. Track and the track number will flash on the display.
Press this button again to start playing the CD.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
This MP3 player will accept MP3 files that were recorded
on an up to 700 MB CD-R CD. The files can be recorded
with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kpbs,
56 kpbs, 64 kpbs, 80 kpbs, 96 kpbs, 112 kpbs, 128 kpbs,
160 kpbs, 192 kpbs, 224 kpbs, 256 kpbs, and 320 kpbs
or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album
will be available when recorded using ID3 tags versions
1 and 2.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files. Long
file, folder, or playlist names or a combination of a large
number of files and folders or playlists may cause the
player to be unable to play up to the maximum number
of files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play
large numbers of files, folders, playlists or sessions
minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist name.
You can also play an MP3 CD that was recorded using no
file folders. The system can support up to 11 folders in
depth, though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimum
in order to keep down the complexity and confusion in
trying to locate a particular folder during playback. If a
CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let
you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all
items over the maximum will be ignored.
3-51
Root Directory
Order of Play
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
be accessed before root folders or files.
Tracks will be played in the following order:
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files will
be located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions will have no function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying the
name of the folder the radio will display ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root
folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder the
radio will display ROOT.
3-52
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
will begin from the first track under the root
directory. When all tracks from the root directory
have been played, play will continue from files
according to their numerical listing. After playing the
last track from the last folder, play will begin
again at the first track of the first folder or root
directory.
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display,
see DISPL later in this section. The new track name
will be displayed.
File System and Naming
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name
is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will
display the file name without the extension (such
as.mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or 4 pages
will be shortened. The display will not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension of
the filename will not be displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
With the ignition on, insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull it in, Loading, then
Filecheck, then MP3 will appear on the display. The
CD should begin playing. You can insert a CD with
the ignition off.
As each new track starts to play, F001, the track
number, and the song name will appear on the display.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 8cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-53
All of the CD functions work the same while playing
an MP3, except for those listed here. See “Playing a CD”
earlier for more information.
5 DN (Down): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous directory.
6 UP: Press this pushbutton to go to the next directory.
TRACK (Previous/Next File): Turn this knob one
notch to go to the first track in the previous or to go
to the next folder. The player will continue moving
backward or forward through the CD with each turn
of the knob.
DIR (Directory): Press and release this button to repeat
the tracks in the current directory. DIR will appear on the
display.
Press and release this button twice to repeat the tracks
in all of the directories. ALL will appear on the display.
Press and release this button again to turn off
repeat play.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
•
•
•
and try again.
The format of the CD may not be compatible.
See “MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-54
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer
Slide the door open,
in the direction of the
arrow, of the CD
changer.
With the optional CD changer, you can play up to 6 CDs
continuously. Normal size CDs may be played using
the trays supplied in the magazine.
The small CDs (8 cm) can be played only with specially
designed trays.
Notice: Placing heavy objects, which may shift or
slide while driving, in the trunk could damage the CD
changer. If your vehicle has the optional CD changer,
do not put heavy objects in the trunk.
3-55
To eject the magazine
from the player,
press the eject button.
The magazine will
automatically eject.
Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible
to keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer.
To remove the CD trays,
press the CD tray button
of the tray that you want
to load, and carefully
pull the tray out.
The CD tray buttons are located on the right side. Load
each of the magazine trays. Each of the 6 trays holds
one CD. Load the trays from top to bottom, placing a CD
on the tray label side up. If you load a CD label side
down, the CD will not play and an error will occur. Gently
push the tray back into the magazine slot until it locks
into place. Repeat this procedure for loading up to
6 CDs in the magazine.
Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left. When
the door is closed, the changer will begin checking for
CDs in the magazine. This will continue for up to one and
a half minutes depending on the number of CDs loaded.
3-56
Whenever a CD magazine with CDs is loaded in the
changer and the door is closed, the CD symbol will
appear on the radio display. If the CD changer is
checking the magazine for CDs, the CD symbol will flash
on the display until the changer is ready to play. If CD
changer mode is entered during initialization, LOADING
will appear on the display. When a CD begins playing,
a CD and track number will appear on the radio display.
The CD numbers are listed on the front of the magazine.
All of the CD functions are controlled by the radio
pushbuttons except for ejecting the magazine.
6 UP (Next): Press and hold this pushbutton to select
the next CD in the magazine.
Playing a CD
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to listen to
the tracks on the current CD in random, rather than
sequential, order. RDM will appear on the display.
Press this pushbutton again to turn off random play.
While in random, you can turn the tune knob to select
another track.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
The following buttons are used for the trunk-mounted
CD changer.
2 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to repeat the
current track RPT will appear on the display. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.
3 INT (Scan): To scan the tracks on the current CD,
press this pushbutton until INTRO appears on the
display. You will hear the first ten seconds of each track
on the CD. To stop scanning, press this pushbutton
again.
TRACK (Reverse/Fast Forward): Turn this knob
counterclockwise or clockwise to select the previous or
next track on the current CD.
AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when
playing a CD.
Push and hold this knob counterclockwise to quickly
reverse or clockwise to quickly advance within a track.
As the CD advances, the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. CDC will appear on the display when the CD
changer has been selected.
5 DN (Previous): Press and hold this pushbutton to
select the previous CD in the magazine.
Press this button while a CD is playing to pause the
CD. Press this button again to resume play.
3-57
CD Messages
No Maga: An empty magazine is inserted in the CD
changer. Try the magazine again with a CD loaded
in one of the trays.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
The theft-deterrent system is designed to discourage
theft of your radio. When the radio and vehicle are
turned off, your radio has a blinking red light to indicate
that the theft-deterrent system is activated.
The theft-deterrent system also activates when the
audio system has been disconnected from the battery.
When this occurs, the AF code and security code
will have to be entered in order to operate your radio.
An identification card stamped with the AF code
and security code will be provided with the vehicle.
Keep it in a safe place, not in the vehicle.
3-58
To enter the security code do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON.
2. Turn the radio on. AF or COdE will flash on the
display. If AF flashes on the display, go to Step
2. If COdE flashes on the display, go to Step 4.
3. Enter the AF code by using the preset pushbuttons.
COdE will flash on the display.
4. Enter the security code by using the preset
pushbuttons. When the complete security code is
entered, the code will flash three times.
If the security code is not entered correctly, Err will
appear on the display for a few seconds. When
COdE appears back on the display, repeat Step 4.
If the incorrect AF code is entered, an incorrect
frequency level may be chosen and the radio
reception may be affected. If this occurs, reset the
audio system by removing and re-installing the
AUDIO fuse. See “Instrument Panel Fuse Block”
under Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-79 for
more information. Then repeat Steps 1 through 4.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Radio Reception
If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain
radio functions using the buttons on your steering
wheel.
AM
VOL w x (Volume):
Press the up or the down
arrow to increase or to
decrease volume.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can cause
stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noise
from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the
treble to reduce this noise.
FM
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
Care of Your CDs
MODE: Press this button to select FM1, FM2, or AM,
a source, radio, or CD.
SEEK: Press and hold this button to seek to the next
radio station.
Press this button to play the next station you have
programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled, dampen a clean,
soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it,
wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
PWR (Power): Press this button to turn the radio
on and off.
3-59
Care of Your CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the
CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Be sure that the
inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the
inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. Also, for proper radio reception, the antenna
connector at the top-center of the rear window needs
to be properly attached to the post on the glass.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear window
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not clear
the inside rear window with sharp objects.
3-60
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Because this antenna is built into your rear window, there
is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes and
vandals.
If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your vehicle,
and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass, be
sure that you do not damage the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna. There is enough space between the lines to
attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering
with radio reception.
Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting to the back glass.
The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere
with or distort the incoming radio reception. Care
must be taken when cleaning the rear window because
it breaks in the resistive material heating element
and will adversely affect radio and defogger
performance. See your dealer for details.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-6
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-8
Steering ......................................................4-10
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12
Passing .......................................................4-12
Loss of Control .............................................4-14
Driving at Night ............................................4-15
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-16
City Driving ..................................................4-19
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-20
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-21
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-22
Winter Driving ..............................................4-24
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-28
Towing ..........................................................4-29
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-29
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-29
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-31
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-35
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them yourself. These
simple defensive driving techniques could save your life.
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-10.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
4-2
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it is
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if
someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
•
during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about
0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by
drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three
mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors
like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
4-3
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
4-4
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice,
it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
4-5
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be less with one driver and
as long as two or three seconds or more with another.
Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and
eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving
at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could
be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough
space between your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy);
tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
4-6
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem
with the anti-lock brake
system, this warning
light will stay on.
See Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light
on page 3-36.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-7
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear the
anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel the brake pedal
pulsate, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the front brakes to limit wheel spin.
This light will come on
briefly when the ignition
is turned to ON along
with the anti-lock brake
system warning light.
This light will blink when
your Traction Control
System is limiting
wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal. This light will also come on when the anti-lock
brake system is working.
4-8
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the enhanced
traction system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
on page 3-10.
The Traction Control System operates in all transaxle
shift lever positions. But the system can upshift the
transaxle only as high as the shift lever position
you have chosen, so you should use the lower gears
only when necessary.
This light will come on
briefly when the ignition
is turned to ON along
with the anti-lock brake
system warning light.
When the system is on and the parking brake is fully
released, this warning light will also come on to let you
know if there is a problem.
When this warning light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions,
you should always leave the Traction Control System on.
But you can turn the system off if you prefer.
To turn the system
on or off, press the
TCS button located
on the console below
the shift lever.
When you turn the system off, the Traction Control
System warning light will come on and stay on. If the
Traction Control System is limiting wheel spin when you
press the button to turn the system off, the warning
light will come on, but the system will not turn off right
away. It will wait until there is no longer a current
need to limit wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing
the button again. The Traction Control System warning
light should go off.
4-9
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
4-10
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden
acceleration can demand too much of those places.
You can lose control. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-8.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you can not; there is not room. That is the
time for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. See Braking on page 4-6.
It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn
it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided
the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
4-12
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass,
wait for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you are following a larger vehicle. Also,
you will not have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have
a “running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember
that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle
you just passed may seem to be farther away from
you than it really is.)
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
4-13
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
4-14
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your TCS system is off, then
an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking
(including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear).
Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You
may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is
skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make
a “mirrored surface” — and slow down when you have
any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving at Night
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you can not see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
4-15
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes
moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly lighted
objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked
regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be
examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and are
not even aware of it.
4-16
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can not stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires do not have much tread left, you will
get even less traction. It is always wise to go slower and
be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.
The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes
are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can not, try to slow down before you
hit them.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-17
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build
up under your tires that they can actually ride on
the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough
and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle
is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water crossing,
your vehicle can be carried away. As little
as six inches of flowing water can carry away
a smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and
other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warning signs, and otherwise
be very cautious about trying to drive through
flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you can not avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive through them very slowly.
4-18
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
•
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-48.
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would
for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-20.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-19
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up
with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed
most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow
driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on
a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-20
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain
you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under
any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the
next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
•
•
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to
the recommended pressure?
Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-21
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do not let
it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and be
injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-22
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
{CAUTION:
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always have
your engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you
go down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
• Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest gear
possible.
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
•
•
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate
action.
4-23
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies
in your trunk.
Also see Tires on page 5-48.
4-24
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of
sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
What is the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Keep your traction control system on. It improves your
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.
Even though your vehicle has a traction control system,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
the road conditions. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-8.
4-25
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have the anti-lock braking system,
you will want to begin stopping sooner than you would
on dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can not reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads are
clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake
before you are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things
to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
4-26
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can not see
it or smell it, so you might not know it is in
your vehicle. Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle, especially any that
is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
4-27
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to spin your
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can help
you get out when you are stuck, but you must use
caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you
are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible.
Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts
of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin
the wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle
back and forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
See “Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out.”
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-60.
4-28
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
Recreational Vehicle Towing
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear.
By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
may free your vehicle. If that does not get you out after a
few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need
to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle, such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-21.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
4-29
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” that follows
for more information.
Dolly Towing
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear with the
front wheels on the ground could cause transaxle
damage. Do not tow the vehicle from the rear
with the front wheels on the road.
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Turn the ignition to ACC.
3. Put the vehicle in NEUTRAL.
4. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
5. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
6. Release the parking brake.
4-30
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the Maximum
Load weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the
life of your vehicle.
The Tire and Loading Information label shows the
seating capacity and the maximum load your vehicle
can properly carry. The Tire and Loading information
label is attached to the center pillar below the door latch.
This label also lists your vehicle’s original equipment
tire size and the recommended tire inflation pressure.
For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on
page 5-48 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53.
4-31
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the “Maximum Load”amount printed on
the Tire and Loading Information label.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from the maximum load amount,
shown in pounds and kilograms.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“maximum load” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
4-32
Example 1
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Maximum
Load for Example 1 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
C
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
700 lbs (317 kg)
Example 2
Example 3
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
Loading Your Vehicle
Total
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Maximum
Load for Example 2 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
Vehicle Maximum
Load for Example 3 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s maximum
load weight and seating positions. The combined weight
of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle’s maximum load weight.
4-33
Certification Label
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out. Do not carry more than 141 lbs (64 kg) in your trunk.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
The Certification label, found either on the center pillar,
near the Tire and Loading Information label or on
the end of the driver’s door, tells you the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed
the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
4-34
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward as you
can. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Do not use your vehicle to tow a trailer. The vehicle is
not designed or intended for such a use. Towing a trailer
can adversely affect handling, durability and fuel
economy.
4-35
✍ NOTES
4-36
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-13
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-17
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-19
Engine Coolant .............................................5-19
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-21
Engine Overheating .......................................5-22
Cooling System ............................................5-24
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-30
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-31
Brakes ........................................................5-32
Battery ........................................................5-35
Jump Starting ...............................................5-36
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-40
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-41
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-41
Headlamps ..................................................5-41
Front Turn Signal Lamps ...............................5-43
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-44
Parking Lamps .............................................5-45
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .........................................5-46
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-47
Tires ..............................................................5-48
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-53
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-54
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-55
Buying New Tires .........................................5-56
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-57
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-58
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-59
Tire Chains ..................................................5-60
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-61
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-62
Spare Tire ...................................................5-68
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Appearance Care ............................................5-68
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-69
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-72
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-72
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .................5-72
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-74
Finish Damage .............................................5-74
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-75
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-75
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-75
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-77
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-77
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-77
5-2
Electrical System ............................................5-78
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-78
Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-78
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-78
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-78
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-79
Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-85
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-12.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-54.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-25.
5-4
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
Fuel
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide
Fuel Charter which is available from the Alliance
of Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
Canada Only
5-5
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-39 )
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to your
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
5-6
General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that
are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact
a major oil company that does business in the country
where you will be driving.
Filling Your Tank
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle — this is against the law
in some places. Keep children away from the
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
To open the fuel filler door,
pull up on the fuel filler
door release lever located
on the floor to the left
of the driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames and smoking materials away from fuel.
CAUTION:
The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on the
passenger’s side of your vehicle. To remove the
fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise).
(Continued)
5-7
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. This
spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and
is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap
slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
While refueling, hang the tethered cap inside the
fuel door.
5-8
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill your
tank, and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before you remove the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning
the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-72.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-39.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-39.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury
to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
handle inside the
vehicle. It is located on
the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front
of the vehicle and
locate the secondary
hood release lever
under the front center
of the hood.
3. Push the lever to the left as you lift up the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on
properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the engine, you will see the following:
5-12
A. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-24.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-30.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-31.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
F. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 5-32.
G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17.
H. Battery. See Battery on page 5-35.
I. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See “Engine
Compartment Fuse Block” under Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-79.
Engine Oil
If the oil pressure light
appears on the instrument
cluster, it means you
need to check your engine
oil level right away.
For more information, see Oil Pressure Light on
page 3-42.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
5-13
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show the actual level.
Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth,
then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down and check the level.
This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-85.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
hole (A) that shows the proper operating range, your
engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the lower hole at the tip of
the dipstick (B), then you will need to add at least
one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind.
5-14
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle. However, if it is going to be 0°F
(–18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not available,
you may use SAE 10W-30.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-15
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your
engine at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
5-16
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city
maintenance schedule:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
• You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top
of your vehicle.
• The vehicle is used for delivery service, police,
taxi or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months — whichever
occurs first.
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months — whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine
under highway conditions will cause engine oil to
break down slower.
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a
good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of
clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer,
a service station or a local recycling center for help.
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle, near
the battery. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-17
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the engine air cleaner/filter every 15,000 miles
(25 000 km) and replace every 30,000 miles (50 000 km).
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the engine air cleaner/filter remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
1. Open the latches that hold the cover on.
2. Lift off the cover.
3. Check or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Put the cover back on tightly and close the latches.
See Using Your Maintenance Schedule on page 6-4
for replacement intervals.
5-18
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps
to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Engine Coolant
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible. You may also have your fluid level checked
by your dealer or service center when you have your
oil changed.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-22.
Have your dealer or service center change both the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km) if the vehicle
is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
Notice: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeled
other than ESSO LT71141 or TOTAL ATF H50235
may damage your vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by your warranty. Always use
ESSO LT71141 or TOTAL ATF H50235 labeled
automatic transaxle fluid.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and proper
coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −22°F (−30°C).
Give boiling protection up to 268°F (131°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
What to Use
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and coolant
that meets GM specification 1825M, which will not
damage aluminum parts. You can also use a recycled
coolant confirming to GM specification 1825M with a
complete coolant flush and refill. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
5-19
For protection in extremely cold weather conditions,
use a 40/60 mixture of clean, drinkable water and proper
coolant.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant.
5-20
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
The engine coolant surge
tank is located in the
passenger’s side of the
engine compartment.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for more information
on location.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be between the
MAX (A) and MIN (B) marks on the coolant surge
tank. The level rises at engine operation temperature
and drops again when the engine cools down.
Adding Coolant
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
If the level falls below the MIN (B) mark, add the proper
coolant mixtureat the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool. If the surge tank is empty, a special fill
procedure is necessary. See Cooling System on
page 5-24 for instructions on “How to Add Coolant to
the Coolant Surge Tank.”
5-21
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-39.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam
or coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned.
Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
5-22
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood, but to get service
help right away.
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
5-23
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface. Make sure that
the air conditioning is turned off.
A. Coolant Surge Tank
with Pressure Cap
5-24
B. Electric Engine
Cooling Fan
The coolant level should
be between the MIN (B)
and MAX (A) marks on the
coolant surge tank when
the engine is cool.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap
or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
check to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running.
If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running.
If it is not, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
5-25
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not between the MIN (B)
and MAX (A) marks, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and proper coolant at the coolant surge
tank, but be sure the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do
it. See Engine Coolant on page 5-19 for more
information.
5-26
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set
for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, your engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire and you
or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and a proper coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other
parts. Use the recommended coolant and the
proper coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-27
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about two or two and
one-half turns. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. This will allow any pressure still left to be
vented out the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
to the MAX (A) mark on the coolant surge tank.
Wait about five minutes, then check to see if
the level is below the MAX (A) mark. If the level is
below the MAX (A) mark, add additional coolant
to bring the level up to the MAX (A) mark. Repeat
this procedure until the level remains constant
at the MAX (A) mark for at least five minutes.
5-28
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run until you can feel
the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out
for the engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower
than the MAX (A) mark, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the MAX (A) mark.
5. Then replace the
pressure cap.
Be sure the pressure
cap is hand-tight
and fully seated.
See your dealer,
if necessary.
5-29
Power Steering Fluid
The level should be
between the MIN (B)
and MAX (A) marks.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid reservoir is located toward the
front of the engine compartment on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir location.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
If the level drops to or below the MIN (B) mark, add only
enough fluid to bring the level up to the MAX (A) mark.
Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap. Add the power steering fluid to
the appropriate level. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-24.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-30
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir location.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Add washer fluid until the tank is full.
5-31
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is located near the
back of the engine compartment on the driver’s side
of the vehicle. It is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should
have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will
not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
5-32
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid
falls to a low level,
your brake warning
light will come on.
See Brake System
Warning Light on
page 3-35.
What to Add
When you do need brake/clutch fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-24.
Always clean the brake/clutch fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
•
system parts. For example, just a few drops
of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts
so badly that they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in the wrong kind
of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on
your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
See Appearance Care on page 5-68.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake
pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly).
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-33
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Brake Adjustment
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6-23.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
5-34
Every time you apply your brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
GM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no
longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
battery. When it is time for a new battery, get one that
has the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if
you are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-36 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery. This will help keep your battery
from running down.
5-35
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
5-36
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or in the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. Your vehicle’s positive (+) terminal is
located under a red tethered cap on the battery.
The negative (−) terminal is located under a
black tethered cap on the battery. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
Flip the caps up to access the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminals.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-37
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle with the dead
battery has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts, too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-38
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other
end touch metal.
Connect it to the
positive (+) terminal
of the good battery.
Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable
to the negative (−)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
9. Connect the other
end of the negative (−)
cable at least
18 inches (45 cm)
away from the dead
battery, but not near
engine parts that move.
The electrical
connection is just as
good there, and the
chance of sparks
getting back to the
battery is much less.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
5-39
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal and negative (−)
terminal caps to their original positions.
Headlamp Aiming
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
5-40
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low beam
may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers
(for horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers flash their
high beams at you (for vertical aim). If you believe your
headlamps need to be re-aimed, we recommend that you
take your vehicle to the dealer for service. However, it is
possible for you to re-aim your headlamps by following
the procedure in the service manual for your vehicle.
Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps
For any bulb changing procedures not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You
or others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
A. Low-Beam Headlamp
B. High-Beam Headlamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the three bolts from the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the headlamp assembly.
4. Release the two wire bars that retain the
headlamp cap.
5-41
7. Remove the old bulb.
• To remove the high-beam headlamp bulb,
release the spring that retains the bulb.
• To remove the low-beam headlamp bulb,
turn the bulb counterclockwise.
8. Install the new bulb.
• To replace the high-beam headlamp bulb,
install the bulb retaining spring.
• To replace the low-beam headlamp bulb,
turn the bulb clockwise.
9. Connect the wiring harness connector to the bulb
and replace the headlamp cap.
5. Remove the headlamp cap.
6. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from
the rear of the bulb.
5-42
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to install the headlamp
assembly. Then, check the lamps.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
A. Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the three bolts from the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the headlamp assembly.
4. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the
bulb socket.
5. Turn the front turn signal bulb socket
counterclockwise.
Pull the front turn signal bulb socket out of the lamp
housing.
6. Press the bulb inward and turn it counterclockwise
to remove it from the bulb socket.
7. Install the new bulb into the holder by pressing it in
and turning it clockwise.
8. Install the socket into the lamp housing by turning
it clockwise.
9. Connect the wiring harness connector to the bulb
socket.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to install the headlamp
assembly. Then, check the lamps.
5-43
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
1. From inside the vehicle, locate the center
high-mounted stoplamp (CHMSL) housing on the
underside of the rear window shelf.
2. Pry off the lamp housing with a flat tool.
3. Remove the bulb socket.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out of the
bulb socket.
5. Install the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the CHMSL.
7. Push the CHMSL housing back into its original
position.
5-44
Parking Lamps
1. Reach in the
underside of the
front bumper and
turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise.
2. Pull the bulb socket out of the front bumper.
3. Pull the old bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to install the bulb
socket.
5-45
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
1. Open the trunk.
2. Open the trim cover.
3. Remove the bulb socket by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing
the bulb and turning it counterclockwise.
5. Install the appropriate bulb into the socket.
6. Replace the bulb socket into the lamp housing.
Twist the bulb socket clockwise to secure.
7. Replace the trim cover.
8. Close the trunk.
A. Taillamp and Stoplamp
B. Rear Turn Signal Lamp
5-46
C. Back-up Lamp
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” under Part B: Owner Checks and Services on
page 6-18 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways.
Here is how to remove the Shepherd’s Hook type:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2. Press the retaining clip (A) and pull the wiper
blade off the arm.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-47
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner Manual.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
CAUTION:
5-48
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall.
The examples below show a typical passenger car tire
sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(B) Department of Transportation (DOT): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(E) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and temperature
resistance. For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-57.
(F) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-53 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
Passenger Car Tire Example
5-49
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger car tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
“R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and the speed rating of a tire. The load
range represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire
is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings range from
“A” to “Z”.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U. S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is “70,” as shown in item “C”
of the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 70% as high as it is wide.
5-50
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires that hold the
tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles, less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascal (kPa), before a tire has built up heat from
driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-53.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can
also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum cold
inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at
the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds
(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
5-51
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains
a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer,
brand and or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-53 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the
tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
5-52
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When It
Is Time for New Tires on page 5-55.
Tread Width: The width of the tire’s tread.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards,
a tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-57.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg)
plus the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing original equipment tire size and
the recommended cold inflation pressure. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
When to Check
The tire and loading information label, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31, for the location
of your vehicle’s tire and loading information label.
Check your tires once a month or more.
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
• Too much flexing
•
•
•
•
•
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Bad handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
Also, check the pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they’re underinflated. Check the tire’s
inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or
driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
5-53
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-55 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-59 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match your
vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size and
type, do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
5-54
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loading
information label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-85.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing
a Flat Tire” in the Index.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-55
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Tire and Loading Information label. For an example
of this label and its location on your vehicle, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
Make sure the replacement tires are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your vehicle’s original
equipment tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you could
have a crash. Using tires of different sizes may
also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the same size and type tires on all wheels.
CAUTION:
5-56
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a different
size spare than the road tires (those originally
installed on your vehicle). When new, your
vehicle included a spare tire and wheel
assembly with a similar overall diameter as your
vehicle’s road tires and wheels, so it is all right
to drive on it. Because this spare was developed
for use on your vehicle, it will not affect vehicle
handling.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
selection width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system developed
by the Unites States National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction
and temperature performance. (This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires.
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver
or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements.
Traction — AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
5-57
Temperature — A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
5-58
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-62 for more
information.
5-59
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause a crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
5-60
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on
the front tires and tighten them as tightly as possible
with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and
follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you
can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and
retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down
until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels
with chains on will damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like
a skid and may require the same correction you’d use in
a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.
Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-61
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
CAUTION:
5-62
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack
and change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The spare tire and tools you will need are located in
the trunk.
1. Lift and remove the trim cover.
2. Turn the retainer
on the spare tire
counterclockwise
and remove the
retainer.
3. Remove the spare tire. See Spare Tire on page 5-68
for more information.
A. Jack
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Jack Handle
D. Screwdriver
4. Remove the jack, the jack handle and the wheel
wrench. Your vehicle’s jack is stored in a foam
tray in the left side of the trunk. The tools are stored
in a bag in the trunk.
5-63
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1. If your vehicle has wheel covers, use the jack handle
to begin loosening the wheel covers. Using the flat
end of the jack handle or the screwdriver, pry along
the edge of the wheel cover until it comes off.
3. Near each wheel is a notch in the frame which the
jack head fits in.
Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits
firmly into the notch in the vehicle’s frame nearest
the flat tire. Put the spare tire near you.
2. Then use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel
nuts. Do not remove them yet.
5-64
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
4. Insert the jack handle into the jack and the wheel
wrench onto the end of the jack handle.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare tire
to fit underneath the wheel well.
6. Remove all of the wheel nuts by turning them
counterclockwise.
7. Remove the flat tire.
5-65
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your
wheel could fall off, causing a serious
accident.
9. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all the rust or dirt off.
5-66
10. Install the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand
clockwise until the wheel is held against the hub.
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
12. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See “Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut
torque specification.
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
Store the flat tire in the spare tire compartment. Place
the tire in the compartment, then secure the retainer.
Store the jack in its foam tray in the trunk. Store
the tools securely in the trunk. Replace the trim cover.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
specification. See “Capacities and Specifications”
in the index for the wheel nut torque specification.
5-67
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
Store the spare tire in the spare tire compartment. Place
the tire in the compartment, then secure the retainer.
Store the jack in its foam tray in the trunk. Store the tools
securely in the trunk. Replace the trim cover.
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-53 and “Loading Your Vehicle” for information
regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle.
For instruction on how to remove, install or store a spare
tire, see Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-62.
5-68
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than
the road tires that were originally installed on your
vehicle. This spare tire was developed for use on your
vehicle, so you can drive on it.
If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match your
vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size and
type, do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-54.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or windows
when you are cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Naphtha
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Carbon Tetrachloride
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Acetone
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and
carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well.
Benzene
Paint Thinner
Lacquer Thinner
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-75.
Nail Polish Remover
Here are some cleaning tips:
Turpentine
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Do not use any of these unless this manual says
you can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can — before
they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
5-69
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any
loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Do not saturate
the material and do not rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you have cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat
the area with a water and baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
Cleaning Vinyl
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaning instructions
described earlier.
5-70
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do this more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you do not get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning Leather
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap
or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then,
let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument
Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through
the windshield under certain conditions.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or
a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-75.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could
scratch the glass and/or cause damage to the
rear window defogger and the integrated radio
antenna. When cleaning the glass on your vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
5-71
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every
six months. During very cold, damp weather more
frequent application may be required. See Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-24.
5-72
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-75.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-75.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,
sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-73
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
Sheet Metal Damage
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel.
A wax may then be applied.
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes.
These brushes can also damage the surface of
these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
5-74
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas of
finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s
body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Chemical Paint Spotting
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
5-75
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Spot Lifter
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches and other
light surface
contamination.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
fabrics, vinyl, leather
and carpet.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
5-76
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-24.
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label inside of the glove box. It is very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
•
•
•
•
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
5-77
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-54.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses, one for
each headlamp, in the fuse block. An electrical overload
will cause the lamps to turn off. If this happens, have
your headlamp wiring checked right away.
5-78
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due
to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the
motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Five spare fuses are provided in the engine compartment
fuse block. If you ever have a problem on the road and do
not have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the
same amperage. Just pick a feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without — like the radio or cigarette
lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the instrument
panel fuse block and the engine compartment fuse block.
There is a fuse puller located on the engine compartment
fuse block. It can be used to easily remove fuses from the
fuse block.
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the driver’s
side end of the instrument panel. To access the fuses,
grip the back end of the fuse panel door and open by
pulling the cover out.
To reinstall the door, insert the tabs at the front end
first, then push the door into the end of the instrument
panel to secure it.
5-79
Fuses
BLANK
Not Used
BLANK
Not Used
BLANK
Not Used
ECM
BCK/UP
CRUISE
Engine Main Relay, Fuel Pump
Relay, Engine Control Module (ECM)
Back-Up Lamp Switch, Cruise
Control
ABS
Electronic Brake Control
Module (EBCM), A/D Converter
AUTO A/C
BCM
Automatic Temperature Control,
A/C Compressor Relay, Body
Control Module (BCM)
HVAC
EPS
Manual Air Conditioning, Electronic
Power Steering (EPS), HVAC EPS
AIRBAG
Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM)
BLANK
Not Used
TCM
BTSI
5-80
Usage
Transmission Control Module
(TCM), Brake Transmission
Shift-Interlock/Automatic Transaxle
Shift-Lock (BTSI)
Fuses
BCM
ABS
CLSTR
AUTO A/C
LTR
RADIO
CLK
WSWA
WPR
Usage
Body Control Module (BCM),
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Instrument Panel Cluster, Automatic
Temperature Control, Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL)
Cigarette Lighter, Glove Box Lamp
Radio
Clock, Dome Lamp, Key
Interlock Unit
Windshield Washer
Wiper
HTD/MIR
Outside Rearview Mirror (OSRVM),
Rear Glass Defogger Switch
RADIO
CRUISE
Radio Battery Positive
Voltage, Cruise
HTD/SEAT
Heating Mat, Accessory
Power Outlet
AUTO A/C
CLSTR
Automatic Temperature
Control, Cluster
DLC
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver’s side of the vehicle, near the battery. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location. To access the fuses, press the
top and bottom flaps to release the cover.
To reinstall the cover, push until it is secure.
Data Link Connector (DLC)
5-81
5-82
Fuses
BLANK
Usage
Not Used
Fuses
Usage
I/P FUSE BATT Instrument Panel Fuse Box
LOW BEAM RT Right Side Headlamp Low Beam
ILLUM RT
Illumination, Right Parking Lamp
LOW BEAM LT Left Side Headlamp Low Beam
ILLUM LT
Left Parking Lamp
INT LTS
A/C
Interior Lamp
Air Conditioning
HI BEAM
PASSING
Headlamp Passing Light
HI BEAM
Headlamp High Beam
FUEL
Fuel Pump, Data Link
Connector (DLC)
ECM
Ignition Coil
COOL FAN HI
BCM BATT
IGN 1
HVAC BLWR
IGN 2
FOG DIODE
HORN
Electric Cooling Fan High Speed
PWR/MIR
DRL
FOG LAMPS
Fog Lamp Relay
STOP LAMPS
Brake Switch
Ignition Key (ON, START)
Fog Lamp Relay
Horn
Power Mirror
Daytime Running Lamps
ENG 2
Injector, Variable Induction
System (VIS), Electronic Exhaust
Gas Recirculation (EEGR),
Canister Purge Solenoid
ENG 1
Oxygen Sensor, Generator,
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Body Control Module (BCM)
Ignition Key (ACC, ON, START)
Blower Motor
COOL
FAN LOW
Electric Cooling Fan Low Speed
5-83
Fuses
ABS
PWR/SEAT
S/ROOF
Electronic Brake Control
Module (EBCM)
Front Power Seat
Sunroof
Relays
Electric Cooling Fan High Speed
A/C CMPRSR
Air Conditioning Compressor
HEAD LAMP
Headlamp
COOL FAN
CNTRL
ECM 1
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
FUEL PUMP
SPARE
Spare
COOL
FAN LOW
SPARE
Spare
FUSE PLR
FRT FOG
HORN
Electric Cooling Fan Control
Front Fog Lamp
Horn
ILLUM LAMPS Taillamp
PWR WNDW
Power Window
Fuse Puller
Usage
COOL FAN HI
Engine Control Module (ECM),
Transmission Control Module (TCM),
Engine Main Relay
PWR WNDW
5-84
Usage
ENG MAIN
Fuel Pump
Electric Cooling Fan Low Speed
Power Window
Engine Control Module (ECM),
Ignition Coil
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-24 for more information.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
1.6 lbs
0.73 kg
Brake Fluid
0.5 quarts
0.5 L
Cooling System
8.5 quarts
8.0 L
Engine Oil with Filter
6.8 quarts
6.4 L
17.2 gallons
65.0 L
7.8 quarts
7.4 L
81 lb ft
110 Y
Fuel Tank
Transaxle, Automatic
Complete Overhaul
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in
this manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
2.5L L6 (LBK)
L
Automatic
0.03 inch (0.8 mm)
5-85
✍ NOTES
5-86
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
How This Section is Organized .........................6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-4
Selecting the Right Schedule ...........................6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ..............6-6
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ......6-13
Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................6-18
At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-18
At Least Once a Month .................................6-18
At Least Twice a Year ...................................6-19
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-19
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6-22
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection ............................6-22
Exhaust System Inspection ............................6-22
Fuel System Inspection ..................................6-22
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6-23
Throttle System Inspection .............................6-23
Brake System Inspection ................................6-23
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants ................................................6-24
Part E: Maintenance Record ...........................6-25
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
If you want to get the service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-12.
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your GM dealer’s service department do these jobs.
Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supported service
people that will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the work.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department can perform for you.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
lists some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed
on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
In this part are scheduled maintenance services which
are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. But we do not know exactly how you
will drive it. You may drive short distances only a few
times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the
time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,
to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of the different ways people use their vehicles,
maintenance needs may vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have questions
on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your
dealer.
6-4
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when to schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs,
you will know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these on the tire and loading
information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
Selecting the Right Schedule
Short Trip/City Intervals
First you will need to decide which of the two schedules
is right for your vehicle. Here is how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if
any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This
is particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling, such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police,
taxi or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if you
operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that
these conditions cause engine oil to break down sooner.
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection. Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Replacement. Drive Belts Inspection.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement. Spark Plug
Replacement. Cooling System Service. EVAP System
Service. PCV System Service. Brake Fluid Change
(or 24 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
6-5
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of
the conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the
vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area
or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City
schedule for these conditions.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions will cause engine oil to break
down slower.
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle.
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-18
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-22.
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection. Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Replacement. Drive Belts Inspection.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement. Spark Plug
Replacement. Cooling System Service. EVAP System
Service. PCV System Service. Brake Fluid Change
(or 24 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
6-6
Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-23.
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more
information. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
6-7
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +)
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
6-8
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-19 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and
neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and solenoid
valve filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake fluid (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first).
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary,
replace the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect filter at every engine oil change.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for
more information. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
6-9
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-10
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-19 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and
neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and solenoid
valve filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake fluid (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first).
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect filter at every engine oil change. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more
information. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-11
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-19 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and
neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and solenoid
valve filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake fluid (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first).
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
6-12
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled
Maintenance
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle.
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-18
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-22.
Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-23.
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-13
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-19 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and
neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and solenoid
valve filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
6-14
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake fluid (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first).
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive
regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require
replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-19 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and
neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and solenoid
valve filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake fluid (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first).
6-15
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17 for more information.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-16
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect drive belts.
❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-19 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and
neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect EVAP canister, vapor lines and solenoid
valve filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Inspect PCV system. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change brake fluid (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first).
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-54 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
6-17
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified
to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-31 for further
details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to
your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones,
as shown in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for further
details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add the proper
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-19 for further details.
6-18
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-48 for further
details.
Cassette Tape Player Service
Clean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be done
every 50 hours of tape play. See Audio System(s)
on page 3-48 for further details.
At Least Twice a Year
Automatic Transaxle Inspection
Restraint System Check
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.
A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
Check for leaks. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer and have it repaired as soon as possible.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Wiper Blade Check
Body Lubrication Service
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-72.
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assemblies,
secondary latches, pivots, spring anchor and release
pawl, hood and door hinges, rear folding seats, fuel door
hinge, liftgate hinges, power sliding door cable and
sliding door track(s). Part D tells you what to use. More
frequent lubrication may be required when exposed
to a corrosive environment.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-24.
6-19
Starter Switch Check
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-26 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
6-20
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-26 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN position,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves
out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The key should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could
be injured and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front of your
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.
Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking
brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
6-21
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department do these jobs. Make sure any
necessary repairs are completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-12.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-29.
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the
drive axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage.
Replace seals if necessary.
6-22
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and
rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need
to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator
and cruise control cables.
6-23
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM 6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-13.
Engine
Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water (preferably distilled) and good
quality Ethylene Glycol Base Coolant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378560, in
Canada 993089) and conforming
to GM Specification 1825M or
recycled coolant conforming to
GM Specification 1825M.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-19.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent.
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen
6-24
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
®
Power Steering DEXRON -III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
System
Automatic
Transaxle
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ESSO LT
71141 or TOTAL ATF H50235.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose
(GM
Part
No.
U.S.
12346241, in
Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-25
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-26
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
6-27
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-28
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ..................................................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ................................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-12
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-12
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage
and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. You can find your specific vehicle information
all in one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual. (United States only)
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members. (United States only)
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
7-4
United States – Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA® (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada – Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas – Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) – Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your vehicle
(hand controls, wheelchair/
scooter lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers
and mobility equipment installers. The offer is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your
vehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call the
GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Security While You Travel
1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
As the proud owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you
are automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Chevrolet’s Roadside
Assistance toll-free number is staffed by courteous
and capable Roadside Assistance Representatives who
are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
7-6
•
•
•
•
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles.
Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling
accident. Assistance when the vehicle is mired in
sand, mud or snow.
Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. (The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.)
Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
Telephone number of your location
•
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number and delivery
date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
While we hope you never have the occasion to use
our service, it is added security while traveling for
you and your family. Remember, we are only a
phone call away. Chevrolet Roadside Assistance:
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-234-8872), text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
Chevrolet’s judgement, the claims become excessive
in frequency or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Buick reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to
offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required. This will
reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.
7-7
Plan Ahead When Possible
Shuttle Service
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles from the dealership.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
7-8
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement (five day maximum) may be available for
the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus. In
addition, should you arrange transportation through a
friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel
expenses (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program Information
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
you obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
of $30.00 a day and must be supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or
rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it
is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as
a courtesy rental.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact you dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-9
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that
monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components to
optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for air bag
deployment and, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock
braking and to help the driver control the vehicle
in difficult driving situations. Some information may be
stored during regular operations to facilitate repair
of detected malfunctions; other information is stored only
in a crash or near crash event by computer systems
commonly called event data recorders (EDR).
In a crash or near crash event, computer systems, such
as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about the
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated, such
as engine speed, brake applications, throttle position,
vehicle speed, safety belt usage, air bag readiness, air
bag performance data, and the severity of a collision.
This information has been used to improve vehicle
crash performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
7-10
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the SDM is required.
GM will not access information about a crash event or
share it with others other than
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or SDM.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition
to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately
notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying
General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and specifications
for GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
7-12
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product
Service Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your
General Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-13
✍ NOTES
7-14
A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-17
Adaptive Shift Logic ........................................ 2-24
Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-31
Additional Program Information ........................... 7-9
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-78
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) .............. 3-50
Air Bag
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-33
Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-46
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-52
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-54
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-52
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates? .................................................. 1-53
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-51
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-49
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-17
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) .... 7-10
AM ............................................................... 3-59
Antenna, Backglass ......................................... 3-60
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ............................ 4-6
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-36
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-68
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-72
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-75
Appearance Care (cont.)
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............
Finish Damage ............................................
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Arming the System .........................................
Ashtrays ........................................................
Audio System(s) .............................................
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................
Backglass Antenna ......................................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Radio with CD ............................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer ..........................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
Automatic Climate Control System .....................
Automatic Operation ........................................
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
Automatic Transaxle Inspection .........................
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check .............................................
Auto-Off Headlamps ........................................
5-69
5-72
5-74
5-74
5-75
5-75
5-72
2-15
3-18
3-48
3-59
3-60
3-60
3-59
3-48
3-58
3-55
3-59
3-22
3-22
5-19
2-22
6-19
6-20
3-14
1
B
Backglass Antenna .......................................... 3-60
Battery .......................................................... 5-35
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-6
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-21
Body Lubrication Service .................................. 6-19
Brake
Parking ...................................................... 2-26
System Inspection ....................................... 6-23
System Warning Light .................................. 3-35
Brake Adjustment ............................................ 5-34
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-32
Brake Pedal Travel ......................................... 5-34
Brake Wear ................................................... 5-33
Brakes .......................................................... 5-32
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-18
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-41
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-44
Front Turn Signal Lamps .............................. 5-43
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-41
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-40
Headlamps ................................................. 5-41
Parking Lamps ............................................ 5-45
2
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-46
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-56
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-5
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-7
Canceling the Rear Door Security Lock .............. 2-10
Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-85
Carbon Monoxide ................... 4-24, 4-35, 2-11, 2-29
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-72
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-60
Your CDs ................................................... 3-59
Cassette Tape Player Service ........................... 6-18
CD Changer, Trunk-Mounted ............................ 3-55
CD Messages ........................................ 3-54, 3-58
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-34
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-44
Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-60
Charging System Light .................................... 3-34
Check
Engine Light ...............................................
Check Engine Light .........................................
Checking Coolant ............................................
Checking Engine Oil ........................................
Checking Things Under the Hood ......................
Checking Your Restraint Systems ......................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...................................
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ..........................
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ...................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear
Seat Position ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Seat Position ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ...........................................
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
3-39
3-39
5-20
5-14
5-10
1-55
5-75
1-34
1-30
1-40
1-28
1-43
1-46
1-43
1-46
1-37
1-39
1-37
3-18
Cleaning
Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-69
Outside of Your Vehicle ................................ 5-72
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-75
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-72
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels .............................. 5-74
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................... 5-73
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet .................................... 5-69
Cleaning Glass Surfaces .................................. 5-71
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ................. 5-71
Cleaning Leather ............................................ 5-71
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ........... 5-71
Cleaning Tires ................................................ 5-74
Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-70
Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades .............. 5-73
Climate Control System ................................... 3-18
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-28
Automatic ................................................... 3-22
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-28
Clock ............................................................ 3-46
Coinholder(s) .................................................. 2-33
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-39
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-21
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-21
3
Coolant (cont.)
Cooling System .............................................. 5-24
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-43
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-33
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-13
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................ 7-11
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-12
4
D
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ......................... 3-14
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ............. 3-44
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Defogging and Defrosting ......................... 3-20, 3-26
Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-30
Disarming the System ..................................... 2-16
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-30
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-16
Door
Ajar Light ................................................... 3-47
Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-8
Door Ajar Reminder ....................................... 2-9
Locks .......................................................... 2-7
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-16
Seat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-3
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-15
City ........................................................... 4-19
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-20
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-22
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-16
Winter ........................................................ 4-24
Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-25
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-18
Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-18
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ......................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Headlamp Wiring .........................................
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
Emergency Trunk Release Handle .....................
5-78
5-79
5-78
5-78
5-78
2-12
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs ...................................................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Battery .......................................................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............
Coolant ......................................................
Coolant Heater ............................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ...........................
Cooling System Inspection ............................
Engine Compartment Overview ......................
Exhaust .....................................................
Oil .............................................................
Overheating ................................................
Starting ......................................................
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ......................
Engine Coolant Level Check .............................
Engine Oil Additives ........................................
Engine Oil Level Check ...................................
Entry Lighting .................................................
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................
Express-Down Window ....................................
Exterior Lamps ...............................................
3-41
5-17
5-35
3-39
5-19
2-21
3-39
6-23
5-12
2-29
5-13
5-22
2-20
5-81
6-18
5-16
6-18
3-16
7-10
2-14
3-13
5
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-17
Finding a Station ............................................ 3-48
Finish Care .................................................... 5-73
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-74
Flash-to-Pass Feature ....................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-61
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-62
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-19
Power Steering ........................................... 5-30
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-31
FM ............................................................... 3-59
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-15
Folding the Seatback ........................................ 1-9
Footnotes ................................................ 6-6, 6-13
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-44
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-45
System Inspection ....................................... 6-22
6
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-79
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-78
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-39
Fuel .......................................................... 3-44
Speedometer .............................................. 3-32
Tachometer ................................................. 3-32
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-33
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .................................................... 7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-8
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-40
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-8
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-78
Headlamps .................................................... 5-41
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-41
Front Turn Signal Lamps .............................. 5-43
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-41
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-5
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-3
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-43
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-22
Hold Mode ..................................................... 2-25
Hold Mode Functions ...................................... 2-25
Hold Mode Light ............................................. 3-38
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How the System Alarm is Activated ................... 2-16
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank ................................................. 5-26
How to Check ................................................ 5-53
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-30
How to Detect a Tamper Condition .................... 2-16
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ....... 5-18
How to Turn Off the System Alarm .................... 2-16
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-16
Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-18
I
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-23
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-22
If the Light Is Flashing ..................................... 3-40
If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-40
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard ......................... 4-26
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-28
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-19
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check .......................... 6-21
Immobilizer .................................................... 2-17
Immobilizer Operation ...................................... 2-17
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-30
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-53
Inspection
Brake System ............................................. 6-23
Engine Cooling System ................................ 6-23
Exhaust System .......................................... 6-22
Fuel System ............................................... 6-22
Part C - Periodic Maintenance ....................... 6-22
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal ......................................... 6-22
Throttle System ........................................... 6-23
Instrument Panel
Cluster ....................................................... 3-31
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-15
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............................ 5-79
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-15
7
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-36
K
Key Lock Cylinders Service .............................. 6-19
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Lamps
Exterior ......................................................
Interior .......................................................
Lamps On Reminder .......................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ................................... 1-16,
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ...................................
Leaving Your Vehicle .......................................
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running ...
Light
Air Bag Readiness .......................................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...................
Brake System Warning .................................
8
3-13
3-15
3-14
1-25
1-40
1-43
2-11
2-27
3-33
3-36
3-35
Light (cont.)
Charging System ......................................... 3-34
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-43
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator .................. 3-44
Door Ajar ................................................... 3-47
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-43
Hold Mode ................................................. 3-38
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-45
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-39
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-42
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-33
Safety Belt Reminder Tone ........................... 3-33
Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS)
Warning Light .......................................... 3-36
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-37
Traction Control System Active ...................... 3-38
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-37
Trunk Ajar .................................................. 3-47
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-31
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-10
Locks
Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-8
Door ........................................................... 2-7
Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-11
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-10
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10
Long Trip/Highway Definition .............................. 6-6
Long Trip/Highway Intervals ............................... 6-6
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ........ 6-13
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-14
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-45
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-5
M
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-18
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-18
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-19
At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-19
Brake System Inspection .............................. 6-23
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-23
Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-22
Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-22
How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ..... 6-13
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services .............. 6-18
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ....... 6-22
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants ............................................... 6-24
Part E - Maintenance Record ......................... 6-25
Selecting the Right Schedule .......................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ............. 6-6
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection .......................... 6-22
Throttle System Inspection ............................ 6-23
Using Your ................................................... 6-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-39
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-5
Manual Operation ........................................... 3-23
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Map Lamps .................................................... 3-16
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ................. 2-5
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/
Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) – Customer Assistance ....................... 7-5
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-31
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-31
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-33
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-33
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-32
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
9
N
P
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-18
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-27
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-28
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-26
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-29
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check ........................... 6-21
Parking Lamps ............................................... 5-45
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............. 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................. 6-18
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-22
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants .................................................. 6-24
Part E - Maintenance Record ............................ 6-25
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-28
Passing ......................................................... 4-12
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-8
Playing a CD ......................................... 3-50, 3-57
Playing the Radio ........................................... 3-48
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-17
Door Locks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System ......................................... 5-78
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-32
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-32
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-12
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-13
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-42
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-28
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
Opening a Rear Door When the Security
Lock is On ................................................. 2-10
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-28
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-33
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-33
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-32
Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-13
10
Power (cont.)
Seat ............................................................ 1-3
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-30
Windows .................................................... 2-14
Power Steering ............................................... 4-10
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-27
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-15
R
Radios .......................................................... 3-48
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-60
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-59
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-48
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-58
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer .......................... 3-55
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-59
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-10
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................... 2-34
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-9
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-24
Rear Window and Outside Mirror
Defogger ............................................ 3-21, 3-27
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-31
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-31
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-6
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-29
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5
Remote Trunk Release .................................... 2-12
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ............................................. 5-64
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-63
Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-34
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .............................................. 1-55
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-11
General Motors ........................................... 7-12
United States Government ............................ 7-11
Restraint System Check ................................... 6-19
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-55
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-55
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-55
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-55
11
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-24
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-29
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-30
S
Safety Belt
Pretensioners .............................................. 1-27
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-33
Reminder Tone ............................................ 3-33
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-72
Driver Position ............................................ 1-16
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-16
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-15
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-24
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-24
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-23
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-10
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
12
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-3
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-8
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-5
Manual ........................................................ 1-2
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-5
Power Seat .................................................. 1-3
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-9
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-6
Secondary Information Center (SIC) ................... 3-46
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-46
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-43
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-43
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-46
Security While You Travel .................................. 7-6
Selecting the Right Schedule, Maintenance .......... 6-5
Sensors ......................................................... 3-25
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle .......................................... 5-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Service (cont.)
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-39
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-12
Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-13
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-12
Setting Preset Stations .................................... 3-49
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .......................... 3-49
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-74
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-27
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-28
Short Trip/City Definition .................................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Intervals ..................................... 6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ................ 6-6
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-18
Skidding ........................................................ 4-14
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-18
Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-68
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-70
Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-85
Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS)
Warning Light ............................................. 3-36
Speedometer .................................................. 3-32
Starter Switch Check ....................................... 6-20
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-20
Steering ........................................................ 4-10
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-11
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection .............................. 6-22
Steering Tips .................................................. 4-10
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-59
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-7
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-34
Coinholder(s) .............................................. 2-33
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-33
Glove Box .................................................. 2-33
Rear Seat Armrest ....................................... 2-34
Sunglasses Storage Compartment .................. 2-34
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools .......................... 5-67
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools ....................... 5-68
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-28
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-14
Sunglasses Storage Compartment ..................... 2-34
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-35
13
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-32
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...... 5-46
TCS Active Light ............................................. 3-38
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-37
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-58
Theft-Deterrent System .................................... 2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-15
Immobilizer ................................................. 2-17
Immobilizer Operation ................................... 2-17
Throttle System Inspection ............................... 6-23
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7
Tire Inflation Check ......................................... 6-18
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-48
Tire Size ....................................................... 5-50
Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-50
Tires ............................................................. 5-48
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-56
Chains ....................................................... 5-60
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-62
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-61
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-53
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-54
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-68
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-57
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-58
14
Tires (cont.)
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-59
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-55
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-21
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-37
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-39
Torque Lock ................................................... 2-28
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-29
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-35
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-29
Traction
Control System Active Light .......................... 3-38
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-8
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-37
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-19
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-22
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual ............................................ 7-12
Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-32
Trunk ............................................................ 2-11
Trunk Ajar Light .............................................. 3-47
Trunk Lamp ................................................... 3-16
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer ............................. 3-55
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
W
Underbody Flushing Service ............................. 6-21
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-59
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-57
United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4
Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-60
Using an MP3 CD .......................................... 3-51
Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-70
Using the Rear Door Security Lock ................... 2-10
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-30
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-72
Weatherstrip Lubrication ................................... 6-19
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-14
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-17
What to Use .................................. 5-19, 5-30, 5-31
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-58
Replacement ............................................... 5-59
When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-14
When to Change Engine Oil ............................. 5-16
When to Check .............................................. 5-53
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-30
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-18
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-37
Why Safety Belts Work .................................... 1-12
Window Lockout ............................................. 2-14
Windows ....................................................... 2-13
Power ........................................................ 2-14
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-31
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................. 7-10
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-77
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-77
Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-35
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-28
Visor Vanity Mirror .......................................... 2-14
Visors ........................................................... 2-14
15
Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-10
Fluid .......................................................... 5-31
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ................ 6-18
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-47
Fuses ........................................................ 5-78
Windshield Wiper Lever ..................................... 3-9
16
Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-24
Wiper Blade Check ......................................... 6-19
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising